Ultimate Yoga. Yoga of The Inner World. Exercices. Free E-Book

1
Michael Raduga
I
Ultimate Yoga.
Yoga of the Inner World.
Exercices
First Edition
www.obe4u.com
Translated by
Peter Orange
The practice of phase states of the mind(ultimate yoga) is the
hottest and most promising pursuit of the modern age. nli!e in the
past" the notions of #lucid dreaming$" #out%of%body e&perience$ and
#astral pro'ection$ ha(e already lost their mystical halo" and their real
basis has been studied in minute detail from the most non%nonsense
approach. )o*" this phenomenon is accessible to e(eryone"
regardless of their *orld(ie*. +t is no* !no*n ho* to easily master it
and apply it effecti(ely. This te&tboo! gi(es each and e(ery person
something that pre(iously could only be dreamt about % a parallel
reality and the possibility of e&isting in t*o *orlds. This boo! is for
pragmatic people *ho are not used to ta!ing anything on faith or
reading about empty theories. The boo! only deals *ith *hat *or!s
in practice" and nothing else.
Proposals regarding translating and publishing this boo! and other
*or!s of M. Raduga may be sent to aing,aing.ru
-
Table of .ontents/
Part I
Entering the Out-of-Body State
Chater ! " #eneral Bac$ground
The Essence of the Phase Phenomenon
0hy Enter the Phase1
The 2ifestyle of a Practitioner
3lgorithm for Mastering the Phase
Types of Techni4ues
.ontraindications
Recommendations for sing the 5uideboo!
E&ercises for .hapter 1
Chater % " Indirect &echni'ues
The .oncept of +ndirect Techni4ues
Primary +ndirect Techni4ues
6econdary +ndirect Techni4ues
6electing the Right Techni4ues
6eparation Techni4ues
The 7est Time to Practice
.onscious 3*a!ening
3*a!ening *ithout Mo(ing
.ycles of +ndirect Techni4ues
8ints from the Mind
3ggression and Passi(ity
6trategy for 3ction
Typical Mista!es *ith +ndirect Techni4ues
E&ercises for .hapter -
Chater ( " )irect &echni'ues
The .oncept of 9irect Techni4ues
The 7est Time to Practice
+ntensity of 3ttempts
7ody Position
:
9uration of an 3ttempt
Rela&ation
;ariations of sing 9irect Techni4ues
The Free%floating 6tate of Mind
3u&iliary Factors
6trategy for 3ction
Typical Mista!es *ith 9irect Techni4ues
E&ercises for .hapter :
Chater * " Becoming Conscious While )reaming
The .oncept of Techni4ues +n(ol(ing 7ecoming .onscious
*hile 9reaming
Techni4ues for 7ecoming .onscious in a 9ream
3ctions to be 9one *hen 7ecoming .onscious *hile
9reaming
6trategy for 3ction
Typical Mista!es *hen Practicing 7ecoming .onscious
*hile 9reaming
E&ercises for .hapter <
Chater + " ,on-autonomous -ethods
The Essence of )on%autonomous Methods for Entering the
Phase
.ueing Technologies
0or!ing in Pairs
Technologies for +nducing the Phase
8ypnosis and 6uggestion
Physiological 6ignals
.hemical 6ubstances
The Future of )on%autonomous Methods for Entering the
Phase
Typical Mista!es *ith )on%autonomous Techni4ues
E&ercises for .hapter =
Part II
-anaging the Out-of-Body Exerience
<
Chater . " )eeening
The .oncept of 9eepening
Primary 9eepening Techni4ues
9eepening through 6ensory 3mplification
6econdary 9eepening Techni4ues
5eneral 3cti(ity
Typical Mista!es 9uring 9eepening
E&ercises for .hapter >
Chater / " -aintaining
The 5eneral .oncept of Maintaining
Techni4ues and Rules against Returning to the 7ody
Techni4ues and Rules for Resisting Falling 3sleep
Techni4ues against an nrecogni?ed Phase
5eneral Rules for Maintaining
Typical Mista!es *ith Maintaining
E&ercises for .hapter @
Chater 0 " Primary S$ills
The Essence of Primary 6!ills
9iscerning the Phase
Emergency Return. Paralysis
Fighting Fear
.reation of ;ision
.ontact *ith 2i(ing Ob'ects
Reading
;ibrations
Techni4ues for Translocating through Ob'ects
Flight
6uper%abilities
The +mportance of .onfidence
.ontrolling Pain
Moral 6tandards in the Phase
6tudying Possibilities and 6ensations
Typical Mista!es *ith Primary 6!ills
=
E&ercises for .hapter A
Chater 1 " &ranslocation and 2inding O34ects
The Essence of Translocation and Finding Ob'ects
7asic Property of the Phase 6pace
Techni4ues for Translocation
Ob'ect Finding Techni4ues
Typical Mista!es *ith Translocation and Finding Ob'ects
E&ercises for .hapter B
Chater !5 " 6lication
The Essence of 3pplications for Phase 6tates
3pplications 7ased on 6imulation
3pplications 7ased on .ontact *ith the 6ubconscious Mind
3pplication 7ased on +nfluencing Physiology
npro(en Effects
se of the Phase by the 9isabled
Typical Mista!es *hen sing 3pplications
E&ercises for .hapter 1C
Part III
6uxiliary Information
Chater !! " Useful &is
3 Pragmatic 3pproach
+ndependent 3nalysis
3pproach to 2iterature
Practice En(ironment
Tal!ing *ith 2i!e%minded People
The Right 0ay to Deep a Eournal
Chater !% " Practitioners7 Exeriences
The 6ignificance of Other PeopleFs E&periences
3nalysis of 6elected PractitionersG E&periences
E&ercises for .hapter 1-
>
Chater !( " Putting a 2ace on the Phenomenon
6tephen 2aberge
.arlos .astaneda
Robert 3. Monroe
Patricia 5arfield
6yl(an Muldoon
.harles 2eadbeater
Robert 7ruce
Richard 0ebster
.harles Tart
Chater !* " 2inal &est
6endix
3ssessment of PractitionersF E&periences (chapter 1-)
3ns*ers to the Final Test (chapter 1<)
3 6implified 9escription of the Easiest Method for Entering
the Phase using +ndirect Techni4ues
Ta!e Part in Research
The .ell Phone Techni4ue
3ttentionH
The 6chool of Out%of%7ody Tra(el
7rief 5lossary of Terms and 9efinitions
@
2ore8ord
This guideboo! is the result of ten years of e&tremely acti(e
personal practice and study of the out%of%body phenomenon(the
phase)" coupled *ith ha(ing successfully taught it to thousands of
people. + !no* all of the obstacles and problems that are usually run
into *hen getting to !no* this phenomenon" and ha(e tried to protect
future practitioners from them in this boo!.
This guideboo! *as not created for those *ho prefer light" empty
reading. +t is for those *ho *ould li!e to learn something. +t contains
no speculations or stories" only dry" hard facts and techni4ues in
combination *ith a completely pragmatic approach and clear
procedures for action. They ha(e all been successfully (erified by a
(ast number of practitioners that often had no prior e&perience. +n
order to achie(e the same result" it is only necessary to read through
each section thoroughly and complete the assignments.
The boo! is beneficial not only for beginners" but also for those *ho
already !no* *hat it feels li!e to ha(e an out%of%body encounter and
ha(e a certain amount of e&perience" as this guideboo! is de(oted not
only to entering the state" but also e4ually dedicated to controlling it.
.ontrary to popular opinion" there is nothing difficult about this
phenomenon if one tries to attain it *ith regular and right effort. On
a(erage" results are reached in less than a *ee! if attempts are made
e(ery day. More often than not" the techni4ues *or! in literally a
couple of attempts.
Michael Raduga
Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel
January 11, 2!
A
Part !
Entering the Phase State
Chater ! " #eneral Bac$ground
&9E ESSE,CE O2 &9E P96SE P9E,O-E,O,
The term phase state (or simply phase) encompasses a number of
*idely !no*n dissociati(e phenomena" many of *hich are referred to
by (arious terms" such as astral or out-of-"ody e#perience. This
concept also includes the more pragmatic term lucid drea$ing" but
does not al*ays e&ist in the sense and form implied by that
e&pression. 8ence" the term phase has been introduced to ease the
study of phenomena that e&ist beyond habitual I and often unfair %
associations and stereotypes. The term out-of-"ody e#perience is
accurate to the e&tent that it describes the sensation felt by a person
e&periencing the phase phenomenon.
% phase has t&o pri$ary attri"utes' 1() practitioners possess full,
conscious a&areness during the e#perience, and 2() practitioners
recogni*e a genuine separation fro$ the physical "ody(
6imultaneously" the degree to *hich practitioners percei(e the
phase en(ironment affects the le(el of sensory e&periences therein"
*hich often occur in a higher form than the sensory e&periences of
*a!efulness. This concept is difficult to imagine *ithout firsthand
e&perience of the phase. 3nd so" it is not *ithout reason that this
practice is considered to be a higher state of self%hypnosis or
meditation" and is often referred to under different names as the
highest possible human achie(ement in (arious religious and
mystical mo(ements (yoga" 7uddhism" etc.).
B
+n essence" the phase is an une&plored state of mind *here one is
unable to control and feel his physical body. +nstead" his space
perception is filled *ith realistic phantom e&periences.
Interesting Fact!
Sensations in the phase state can "e so realistic
that practitioners &ho unintentionally enter phase
often "elieve they are still in the physical "ody, that
the e#perience is occurring in the &a+ing state(
These types of unintended e#cursions $ost often
occur at night or early in the $orning(

+t is belie(ed that up to one 4uarter of the human population has
encountered this phenomenon. 8o*e(er" if (ariations and different
degrees of intensity of the state are ta!en into consideration" it may
be safely assumed that e(eryone has encountered the phase. 6ince the
phase is a rare sub'ect of study" many *ho inad(ertently enter it do
not reali?e *hat has ta!en place once they return to *a!efulness.
Many do not assign any significance to the occurrence of a phase
en(ironment that is not fully formed because shallo* phases donFt
lea(e the same 'olting impression as deep states. Elusi(e as the phase
may seem" this is an e&tremely common phenomenon" accessible to
1C
anyone *illing to consciously learn and apply the correct methods of
achie(ing and maintaining the phase.
W9Y E,&E: &9E P96SE;
6uch a 4uestion can only arise from not fully understanding the
properties of the phenomenon and its nature. 0hen one suddenly
understands at a certain moment that he is 'ust as real as he normally
is" and is standing some*here that is not in the physical *orld *ith
his same hands and body" and can touch e(erything around him and
discern fine details" such much emotion stirs up inside him that no
4uestions arise at all. This is the $ost a$a*ing e#perience that a
person can attain,
The initial phase encounter is al*ays 'olting and sometimes
frightening. 9epending on the indi(idual" fear e&perienced during
initial encounters *ith the phase occurs in about one%third of all
cases. E(en (eteran practitioners encounter fear" *hich spea!s to the
profound nature of the phase state.
0ith time" as rapture ebbs and emotions *ane" thoughts turn from
the fact of the phenomenon itself to*ards ho* to someho* use it.
3nd here" a fantastically di(erse field of practical application opens
up before the practitioner. These applications I *hich this boo!
communicates I are not to be associated *ith the many unpro(en and
dubious methods often described in sundry esoteric literature. The
information presented herein is (erifiable" practical" and attainable.
0hate(er the nature of the phase % a state of mind" or perhaps an
e&ternal e&perience % this is the sole opportunity to/ (isit any part of
the *orld or uni(erseJ see people *ho are out%of%reach in real life"
including relati(es" the deceased" celebrities" and (arious creaturesJ
communicate *ith the enormous resources of the subconscious mind
and obtain information from itJ reali?e desires that are unattainable in
real lifeJ model artistic productionsJ influence physiology" and more.
These are not dull e&periences. They are eminently personal and real.
&9E <I2ES&Y<E O2 6 P:6C&I&IO,E:
11
+t must be said that (arious diets" e&ercises" rituals" and so forth
do not produce noticeable supplementary effects to proper practice of
the phase. )aturally e&istent psychological and physiological comfort
is of the utmost importance. Thus" methods recommending
o(ereating" under%eating" or tormenting oneself *ith (arious diets and
strange e&ercises are useless and ultimately detrimental to a
practitionerFs *ellness and balance" in(ariably producing a negati(e
impact to the effecti(eness of techni4ues taught in this guideboo!.
3dditionally" no meaningful association has been found bet*een
practice of the phase and *hat may be construed as #bad habits$.
Regardless of a lifestyleFs null effect on phase achie(ement" a
healthy" acti(e lifestyle *ill al*ays be recommended to en'oy a good
4uality of li(ing.
Interesting Fact!
-f one "elieves that it is necessary to position one.s
"ed &ith the head"oard facing the /orth&est or
so$e other direction in order to have $ore effective
out-of-"ody e#periences, then doing so &ill
invaria"ly have a positive effect on results(
0o&ever, the issue at hand is not the positioning of
the "ody, "ut a "elief that is a+in to an intention,
&hich in turn is enor$ously i$portant(
+t has been obser(ed that a regular and orderly lifestyle increases
the fre4uency of genuine" lasting phase e&periences. 6leeping
normally and soundly is the most basic e&ample of a lifestyle choice
that produces direct" positi(e impact on results" especially *hen a
practitioner commits to a full nightGs rest se(eral times a *ee!.
6<#O:I&9- 2O: -6S&E:I,# &9E P96SE
3 no(ice practitioner must understand the procedure for learning
and mastering phase entry. This procedure consists of se(eral primary
steps" each of *hich is a uni4ue science unto itself.

1-
1. The first and most important step addresses the techni4ues
used to enter the phase state. +t is not necessary to master e(ery
type of entrance techni4ue (direct" indirect" dream consciousness).
2earning and applying the easiest techni4ues pro(ides the
necessary prere4uisites to more ad(anced methods. +f so desired"
it is possible to try more difficult entrance techni4ues in parallel
*ith the mo(ing on to the subse4uent steps for mastering the
phase.
-. .ontrary to popular opinion" the need for conscious
techni4ues does not cease upon phase entrance. +t is absolutely
necessary to learn and apply methods for deepening the phase to
achie(e a consistently hyper%realistic en(ironment. Failing to
apply deepening techni4ues almost guarantees that e&periences
*ill be dull" uninteresting" and subse4uent practice short%li(ed.
Practitioners should immediately learn and apply deepening
techni4ues after mastering any one entrance method.
:. The third step in(ol(es mastering techni4ues for maintaining
the phase" as *ithout them the a(erage person *ould ha(e phase
e&periences of much shorter duration than is possible. 0hen in
the phase" the 4uestion of ho* to lea(e it almost ne(er occurs. On
the contrary" one is normally thrust from it in the course of
se(eral seconds if one simply does nothing.
<. 3fter learning all the necessary techni4ues for mastering the
phase state" it is time to learn and apply methods of control"
*hich encompass the ability to translocate" find and interact *ith
ob'ects" influence surroundings" and so forth.
=. Once the pre(iously noted steps ha(e been accomplished" a
practitioner may proceed to apply phase e&periences to enhance
e(eryday life. O(er the course of this guideboo!" *e *ill e&amine
do?ens of these (aluable applications in great detail.
1:
0ith basic s!ills mastered" remember that practicing the phase is
*orth*hile and effecti(e only *hen the results are consistent. +f a
practitioner enters the phase only once a month" the e&perience *ill
be too emotional to allo* the obser(ation of important principles and
methodologies. The phase should be encountered at least once a
*ee!. 0or!ing to*ard a le(el higher than a *ee!ly phase entry is
ambitious" e(en beneficial. Realistically" t*o to four phase
e&periences per *ee! might be considered the le(el of a grandmaster"
but this is far from the up*ard boundary.
3s a rule" no(ice practitioners achie(e the phase less often than is
desired. 8o*e(er" *ith regular attempts" success occurs more and
more fre4uently" *hich should help alle(iate any frustration resulting
from failed attempts.
&YPES O2 &EC9,I=UES
There are three primary types of techni4ues that ma!e it possible
to enter the phase/ direct" indirect and drea$ consciousness. These
methods are performed *hile lying do*n or reclining" eyes closed"
the body in a state of total rela&ation.
Interesting Fact!
Often, people have an out-of-"ody
e#perience &ithout prior +no&ledge or
1<
"elief in the pheno$enon( -t 1ust happens,
and a large "ody of evidence has "een
gathered to support this fact( 2ven $ore
interesting is that spontaneous e#periences
often occur after a "rief study of $aterial
a"out the topic, li+e this guide"oo+(((

3irect techni4ues are perfor$ed &ithout any noticea"le lapse in
consciousness( 5hile practicing direct techni4ues, a lapse into sleep
for less than 6 $inutes is not considered a "reach of the techni4ue(
7y definition" direct techni4ues encompass the performance of
specific actions for a pre%defined inter(al of time. 6uccessfully
applied" direct methods result in a phase entrance *ithout passing
through any intermediary states. For BCK of the population" these
techni4ues are the most difficult because the mind naturally e&ists in
an e&cessi(ely acti(e state. +t has been clearly pro(en *ithin the
6choolFs student body that no(ice practitioners do not benefit from
beginning a training regimen *ith direct techni4ues. This is because
direct techni4ues re4uire a thorough understanding and masterful
application of indirect techni4ues in order to be effecti(e. The
incorrect notion that the phase state is e&tremely difficult to enter is
due to the fact that people are more often dra*n to the more difficult
direct techni4ues. +t is al*ays better to approach direct techni4ues
only after becoming e&pert in the use of indirect techni4ues.

-ndirect techni4ues are techni4ues that are put into practice upon
a&a+ening fro$ sleep(
The effecti(eness of indirect techni4ues is not dependent on the
length of the prere4uisite sleep cycle. +ndirect techni4ues can be used
*hile e&iting a full nightFs sleep" after a daytime catnap" or follo*ing
se(eral hours of deep sleep. The most important thing is that there is
a lapse of consciousness into sleep before implementing the
techni4ues.
+ndirect techni4ues are the easiest techni4ues to practice" *hich is
*hy many practitioners use them to enter the phase. 6leep naturally
pro(ides the mind *ith deep rela&ation" *hich is often difficult to
1=
ac4uire by other methods. 6ince sleep is re4uired to perform indirect
techni4ues" it is a con(enient" oft%occurring means to conduct
e&periments *ith the phase. )o(ice practitioners benefit greatly from
the use of indirect techni4ues" and learn firsthand the possibility of
phase entrance.

3rea$ consciousness is ac4uired "y techni4ues that allo&
entrance to the phase through &hat is co$$only referred to as lucid
drea$ing(
+n this case" the phase begins *hen the a*areness that a dream is
occurring happens *ithin the dream itself. 3fter becoming conscious
*hile dreaming" se(eral types of actions can be performed" including
returning to the body and rolling out" *hich *ill be described later.
0hen deepening techni4ues are applied in the conte&t of a conscious
dream" the sensory perceptions of the phase surpass those of normal
*a!efulness.
Techni4ues that facilitate dream consciousness are usually
categori?ed separately from methods used to perform out%of%body
tra(elJ in practice" ho*e(er" it is apparent that the characteristics of
dream consciousness and out%of%body tra(el are identical" *hich
places both phenomena directly in the phase. These practices are
difficult because" unli!e other techni4ues" they do not in(ol(e
specific actions that produce instantaneous results. 3 large measure of
preparatory steps must be obser(ed that re4uire time and effort
*ithout any guarantee of results. 8o*e(er" dream consciousness
techni4ues are not as difficult as direct techni4ues. Moreo(er" the
ma'ority of practitioners" *hether using indirect or direct techni4ues"
e&perience spontaneous a*areness *hile dreaming *ithout ha(ing to
apply techni4ues aimed at dream consciousness.
+n addition to the techni4ues described abo(e" there are also non%
autonomous means and tools/ (arious de(ices" programs" e&ternal
influences" and so forth" *hich can be used to enter the phase. +t is
necessary to mention that these are only useful to practitioners *ho
are able to enter the phase *ithout supplementary assistance.
1>
;arious chemical substances and herbal supplements ha(e been
recommended to assist phase entrance" though using them is unli!ely
to do any good" and use of these has ne(er yielded the effect that can
be achie(ed through unadulterated practice. 3s such" the use of a
chemical crutch is regarded here as completely unacceptable.
CO,&:6I,)IC6&IO,S
E&act scientific proof that entering the phase is dangerous I or
e(en safe % does not e&istJ there has ne(er been an e&hausti(e"
controlled study to pro(e either supposition. 8o*e(er" since the
phase e&ists at the fringes of naturally%occurring states of mind" it can
hardly be assumed dangerous. )otably" the phase is accompanied by
rapid eye mo(ement (REM)" *hich e(ery human e&periences for up
to - hours each night" and this begins to e&plain the phase e&perience
as entirely safe and natural.
3lready confirmed are the psychological influences of the phase
on the physical mind and bodyJ namely" the emotional effects that can
occur during the onset of the phase state.
Phase entry is a (ery profound" incredible e&perience that may
induce fear" *hich is in(o!ed by a natural instinct for self%
preser(ation. The phase can create stress. This is especially true for
no(ices and those poorly ac4uainted *ith the nature of the
phenomenon and techni4ues used to control it. 0ithout !no*ledge
and proper practice" a fear%induced reaction can escalate into full%
blo*n terror. 3fter all" *hile in the phase" fantasy 4uic!ly becomes
reality" and reticent fears can ta!e on hyper%realistic 4ualities. 0hen
this occurs" itFs not the phase en(ironment" but the fear that is
treacherous. +t goes *ithout saying that fear is a to&ic influence"
especially to sensiti(e souls" the elderly" and people *ith physical
ailments" li!e certain cardio(ascular conditions. This does not mean
that persons in these groups should abstain from practicing the phase.
The solution is to learn about and a(oid common stressors associated
*ith the practice" !no* the mechanics of controlling ob'ects" and
understand the principles of ma!ing an emergency e&it.
1@
5i(en the possibility of negati(e phase e&periences" it could be
ad(ised that practitioners limit the time in phase to fifteen minutes"
though it is 4uite e&ceptional to maintain the phase for such duration.
Proposed time limits are entirely theoretical and moti(ated by the fact
that natural REM does not normally last longer than fifteen minutes"
and" at the ris! of side effects due to the alteration of natural cycles"
e&periments directed at unnaturally prolonging REM are not
recommended.
:ECO--E,)6&IO,S
2O: USI,# &9E #UI)EBOO>
9uring classroom instruction at the 6chool of Out%of%7ody
Tra(el" se(eral !ey factors are !no*n to produce positi(e and
negati(e effects to*ard the li!elihood of success during indi(idual
practice/
Positi?e Effect on Practice ,egati?e Effect on Practice
3ttenti(e" thorough study of the
course material
8asty and inattenti(e study of
course materials.
.onsistent *or! *ith practical
elements.
+nconsistent application of
techni4ues.
9iligent completion of technical
elements.
3ppro&imating the techni4ues
outside of recommended
guidelines.
3 rela&ed approach to the sub'ect
matter.
3 hysterical approach to the
matter" #idLe fi&e$.
Deeping a 'ournal of all initial
attempts" follo*ed by recording
successful phase entrances.
3 lac! of personal analysis *hen
problems or a lac! of success are
encountered.
3dhering to the recommended
number of daily entrance
attempts.
E&cessi(e number of attempts per
day.
Regular attempts and practice. 6poradic practice regimen.
1A
nderstanding that the author
!no*s his field *ell
#+ also !no* e(erything + need to
and *ill do as + *antM. This
attitude is good only for those
*ho ha(e a great amount of real
practical e&perience. Reading a
lot on the sub'ect or simply
ha(ing !no*ledge of it is not
e&perience.
Exercises for Chater !
=uestions
1. 0hich alternati(e states are included in the term
#phase$1
-. 8o* does the phase differ from out%of%body tra(el1
:. +s the perception of reality different in *a!ing life than
in the phase *orld1
<. 9oes the phase ha(e applications to day%to%day life1
=. 0hat s!ills must be learned before proceeding to
practical use of the phase1
>. 8o* many types of autonomous phase entrance
techni4ues are there1
@. 0hat is the difference bet*een direct and indirect
techni4ues1
A. 0hich techni4ues are easiest for the ma'ority of
practitioners1
B. +s it *orth trusting (arious de(ices and programs that
promise to be able to help one enter the phase state1
0hy or *hy not1
1C. 6hould one eat meat *hen practicing the phase1
1B
&as$s
1. Try to remember if you ha(e e&perienced phase
encounters in the past.
-. +f you ha(e encountered the phase" *hat type of
techni4ue gained entranceJ direct" indirect" or conscious
dreaming1
:. +f possible" as! some friends and ac4uaintances about
the sub'ect of out%of%body tra(el or conscious dreaming.
9o any of them remember a similar e&perience1 0hat
*as it li!e1
Chater % " Indirect &echni'ues
&9E CO,CEP& O2 I,)I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
5enuine practice of phase entrance is best begun *ith the easiest"
most accessible methods/ indirect techni4ues" *hich are conscious
actions performed upon a*a!ening from sleep. 6ome critics
incorrectly assume that indirect techni4ues are not ideal" and prefer to
start *ith direct techni4ues. 8o*e(er" doing so pro(ides no guarantee
for success and results in a large amount of *asted time and effort.
Starting practice &ith indirect techni4ues guarantees entrance into
the phase(
3 specific uni(ersal techni4ue that suits e(ery practitioner is a
myth since indi(iduals differ *idely in personality" psychology" and
learning speed. 8o*e(er" there is a relati(ely easy uni(ersal
algorithm" or procedure" that accounts for the characteristics of each
person and allo*s for the most rational" effecti(e *ay to attain the
initial phase entrances. This algorithm encompasses cyclic practicing
of the indirect techni4ues co(ered in this chapter. 0ithout e&ception"
these techni4ues % despite their (arying degrees of difficulty % are
suitable for e(ery practitioner *ho *ishes to e&perience the phase.
Results can be e&pected immediately follo*ing the first fe*
attemptsJ ho*e(er" to achie(e measurable results" an a(erage of fi(e
daily" conscious attempts must be made. Ma!ing more than fi(e
attempts o(er the course of a day is fine" too. There is nothing
difficult to understand about performing the techni4ues since they are
clearly laid out and based on real internal processes. Re$ar+a"ly, due
to correctly practiced indirect techni4ues, $ore than half of students
at the live school attain phase entrance after only t&o days(
Interesting Fact!
Many e#perienced practitioners prefer to "ypass
the effort associated &ith direct techni4ues and
hone their s+ills through the sole use of indirect
techni4ues(

+n order to ensure that oneFs efforts are most fruitful and
producti(e" *e are going to indi(idually e&amine each step and
principle behind the actions in great detail. 2et us start from a
description of the techni4ues themsel(es" *hich *ill actually apply
practically 'ust as much to direct techni4ues as to indirect techni4uesJ
as they only differ in character and length of application.
There are plenty of techni4ues" so after practicing all of the indirect
techni4ues presented in this chapter" a practitioner should be able to
choose three or four of the most straightfor*ard" indi(idually
effecti(e methods.
6eparation techni4ues *ill be e&amined later. They are completely
different from usual techni4ues" *hich only bring one into the phase"
but do not necessarily themsel(es lead to separation from the body. +t
is often also necessary to !no* ho* to stop percei(ing oneFs physical
body after employing these techni4ues.
+t is necessary to understand *hen to employ these techni4ues" and
the importance of *a!ing from sleep *ithout opening the eyes or
mo(ing the body. 3ttempting to enter the phase immediately upon
a*a!ening must be learned and practiced to mastery since it
constitutes the main barrier to successful practice.
3fter e&amining the peripheral information surrounding indirect
techni4ues" the cycles of indirect techni4ues *ill be e&amined"
including *hat there are" ho* they *or!" and ho* they are best used.
6uccessful phase entrance is the direct result of performing these
cycles. 8o*e(er" there are e&ceptions" and it is not completely
necessary to proceed *ith these cycles if oneGs o*n mind someho*
hints *hat e&actly one should start from" *hich *e *ill also e&amine
separately.

P:I-6:Y I,)I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
/ota Bene, The techni4ues described belo* are the simple
components of indirect techni4ue cycles. +mplementing each
techni4ueFs description is far from effecti(e. Of the list gi(en belo*"
it behoo(es the indi(idual practitioner to choose the most
comprehensible and interesting techni4ues" then acti(ely study and
apply the instructions for use.
OBSE:@I,# I-6#ES
&esting Indi?idual Effecti?eness
+mmediately after *a!ing from sleep" remain motionless" eyes
closed. Obser(e the blan! space behind the eyes for : to = seconds
and try to locate recogni?able pictures" images" or symbols. +f nothing
appears during this e&ercise" the techni4ue should be substituted. +f
something appears" continue to passi(ely obser(e the images.
Mean*hile" the images *ill become increasingly realistic" literally
en(eloping the practitioner. 9o not aggressi(ely e&amine the details
of the image" or it *ill (anish or change. The image should be
e&perienced as a panorama" ta!ing e(erything in. Obser(e the images
as long as the 4uality and realism increases. 9oing so yields t*o
possible results/ the practitioner becomes part of the surroundings"
and has achie(ed the phase" or the image becomes borderline or
absolutely realistic" and separation from the physical body is
possible.

&raining
To train the use of this techni4ue" lie do*n in the dar!" eyes closed"
and obser(e the blac!ness for se(eral minutes" identifying any
specific images that may arise from simple spots or floaters" and then
gradually transition to *hole pictures" scenes" or scenarios. 0ith
practice" this techni4ue is (ery easy and straightfor*ard. 3 common
mista!e made during practice of this techni4ue is *hen the
practitioner aggressi(ely attempts to con'ure images (ersus passi(ely
obser(ing *hat is naturally presented.
P96,&O- WI##<I,# A-O@E-E,&B
closed. Try to *iggle a part of the body for : to = seconds" but
*ithout using any muscles. +f nothing mo(es during the attempt" try a
different techni4ue. +f a sensation of *iggling occurs" e(en in the
slightest" continue to employ the techni4ue" stri(ing to increase the
range of mo(ement as much as possible. This techni4ue should be
performed (ery aggressi(ely" not passi(ely. 3s soon as the range of
mo(ement nears or e&ceeds four inches % *hich may ta!e 'ust se(eral
seconds % the follo*ing situations may arise/ one momentarily finds
oneself someho* in the phase" or the *iggled part of the body begins
to mo(e freely. The occurrence of mo(ement during practice of this
techni4ue allo*s the practitioner to transition to a separation
techni4ue and attempt to lea(e the body.
0hile practicing phantom *iggling" strong (ibrations may occur"
amid *hich separation may be attempted. 6ounds also often arise"
allo*ing the opportunity to practice listening in" *hich can lead to
phase entrance.
The phantom *iggling techni4ue is not meant to produce an
imagined mo(ement by a phantom body. The point of the techni4ue
is to attempt the mo(ement of a physical body part *ithout using
muscular action. That is" the focus should rest upon an internal
intention of mo(ement *ithout physical action. 0hen the sensation
occurs" it differs little from its real counterpart and is often
accompanied by hea(iness and resistance. 5enerally" there is (ery
little range of mo(ement at first" but *ith concentrated effort the
range of mo(ement noticeably increases.
+t does not matter *hich part of the body is used to e&ercise
phantom mo(ement. +t may be the *hole body or 'ust one finger.
)either is the speed of the mo(ement important. +ncreased range of
percei(ed mo(ement is the aim of the techni4ue.
&raining
To train the techni4ue of phantom *iggling" rela& a hand for
se(eral minutes *hile lying do*n" eyes closed. Then" aggressi(ely
en(ision the follo*ing hand mo(ements" *ithout mo(ing any
muscles" for t*o to three minutes each/ rotating" up%do*n" left%right"
e&tending the fingers and dra*ing the fingers together" clenching and
unclenching a fist. )o sensations *ill occur at first. 5radually" the
sensation of muscular action *ill become so apparent that the
percei(ed mo(ement *ill be indistinguishable from real mo(ement.
9uring the first training attempts" practitioners are often tempted to
open their eyes to see if actual mo(ement is occurring I thatFs ho*
real the sensation feels.
<IS&E,I,# I,
closed. Try to listen to noise in your head. 9o this for : to = seconds
*ithout mo(ing and *ithout opening the eyes. +f nothing happens
during this period of time" s*itch to another techni4ue. +f any sounds
li!e bu??ing" humming" ra(ing" hissing" *histling" tin!ling" or
melodies occur" listen attenti(ely. 0ith results" the sound *ill
increase in (olume. 2isten in as long as there is some dynamism in
the (olume of the sound. 0hen the sound stops" or the noise becomes
loud enough" a separation techni4ue may be attempted. 6ometimes"
the noise itself thro*s one into the phase *hile listening. 3t a certain
stage" sounds may be e&tremely loud and ha(e e(en been described
as comparable to the roar of a 'et%engine.
The action of listening in consists of acti(ely and attenti(ely
e&ploring a sound" the *hole of its tonality and range" and ho* it
reacts to the listener.
There is an optional techni4ue !no*n as forced listening in" *here
it is simply necessary to strongly *ant to hear noise" and mean*hile
ma!e intuiti(e internal efforts" *hich" as a rule" are correct.
Performed correctly" forced sounds *ill intensify the same *ay as
those percei(ed *ith the standard listening in techni4ue.
&raining
+n order to practice listening in" lie do*n in a silent place" eyes
closed" and listen for sounds originating in the head. These attempts
are usually cro*ned *ith success *ithin se(eral minutes of trying"
and one starts to hear that noise that absolutely e(eryone has *ithin.
One simply has to !no* ho* to tune in to it.
:O&6&IO,
closed. +magine the physical body is rotating along an a&is for = to 1C
seconds. +f no unusual sensations occur" try another techni4ue. +f
(ibrations occur during rotation or the mo(ement suddenly feels
realistic" then continue the rotation techni4ue as long as there is
progress in the sensationFs de(elopment. There are se(eral possible
outcomes *hen rotation is practiced. The imagined rotation is
replaced by a (ery real sensation of rotating along an imagined a&is.
0hen this occurs" a practitioner may easily lea(e the body. The other
outcome is the sudden presence of strong (ibrations or loud sounds"
amid *hich separation from the body is possible. 9uring rotation"
separation has been !no*n to spontaneously occur and the
practitioner enters the phase.

&raining
To practice rotation" imagine re(ol(ing around the head%to%foot
a&is for se(eral minutes *hile lying do*n" eyes closed. +t is not
necessary to focus on the (isual effects of rotation or minute
sensations in the body. The !ey factor is the (estibular sensation that
arises from internal rotation. 3s a rule" many practitioners e&perience
difficulty performing full rotation. One person may be limited to BC
degrees of mo(ement *here another e&periences 1AC degrees. 0ith
consistent" correct practice" full :>C degree rotation *ill occur.

2O:CE) 26<<I,# 6S<EEP
closed. Picture a s*ift" compulsory fall into sleep for = to 1C seconds"
and then return to *a!efulness" follo*ed by an aggressi(e attempt at
separating from the physical body. 5enerally" after performing this
techni4ue" the practitionerFs state of mind 4uic!ly transitions bet*een
different states of brain. 6trong (ibrations often occur *hen emerging
from this #pseudo%sleep$" *here the li!elihood of separation from the
body is increased" accompanied the opportunity to practice other
techni4ues. Resist actually falling asleep during this e&ercise.
+n essence" forced falling asleep is a tric! on the mind designed to
ta!e ad(antage of the brainFs refle&i(e responses to actions that
immediately induce semi%conscious states that allo* easy entrance
into the phase. Employing it is especially effecti(e upon an e&tremely
alert a*a!ening" or after a mo(ement is unintentionally made upon
a*a!ening.
Forced sleep is 4uite simple. +t re4uires a cessation of internal
dialogue" shifting mental focus a*ay from e&ternal stimuli" and a
strong desire for a 4uic! reentrance to the sleeping state follo*ed by
rene*ed *a!efulness after se(eral seconds. +n order to understand
ho* this is done" it is sufficient to recall ho* one had urgently made
oneself fall asleep before" or ho* one had fallen asleep after ha(ing
been e&hausted" or after a long period of sleep depri(ation.
3 common mista!e in practice occurs *hen people fall asleep
after attempting the techni4ue" forgetting the necessary desire to
4uic!ly return to consciousness.
SECO,)6:Y I,)I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
S&:6I,I,# &9E B:6I,
closed. Ma!e - to : s4uee?es straining the brain. This is !no*n as
straining the brain. +f nothing happens" try another techni4ue. +f
(ibrations occur during this e&ercise" try to mo(e the (ibrations
around the body and amplify them by continuing to strain the brain.
The stronger the (ibrations" the higher the probability that a
separation techni4ue may be applied. 6pontaneous separation may
occur. 0hile straining the brain" a practitioner may e&perience the
sounds necessary for transitioning to a listening in techni4ue.
The (ibrations that arise from straining the brain are (ery stri!ing.
+f there is any doubt as to *hether the (ibrations happened" then most
li!ely a practitioner did not e&perience them. The (ibrations may be
described as an intense" painless electrical current mo(ing through or
gripping the body. 3t times" the sensation of a total numbing of the
body is e&perienced.

&raining
To practice straining the brain" lie do*n" eyes closed" and attempt
to strain the brain. 9o not thin! about the fact that actually s4uee?ing
the brain is impossible. The imagined straining should be spasmodic"
rhythmic. Practitioners may strain the entire brain or specific parts of
it. 9uring the process" a sensation of pressure or e(en real strain
arises in the brain. 0ith B=K of practitioners" this strain usually
occurs *ithin the first fe* minutes of e&ercise. This techni4ue should
be committed to memory *hen training so that it may be instantly
recalled and practiced upon a*a!ening from sleep.
Practitioners often ma!e the mista!e of unintentionally straining
their facial and nec! muscles instead of straining the interior of their
heads. This error should be a(oided at all costs" lest it become a habit
that frustrates genuine practice.

S&:6I,I,# &9E BO)Y WI&9OU& USI,# -USC<ES

This techni4ue in(ol(es straining the *hole body and differs little
from straining the brain. 0hen a*a!ening from sleep" ma!e one to
three attempts at straining the *hole body" refraining from actually
fle&ing any physical muscle. +f nothing happens" try another
techni4ue. ;ibrations may occur as a result" and amplifying these by
straining the body *ithout using muscles can induce a spontaneous
separation from the body. 0hen the (ibrations become strong
enough" attempt a separation techni4ue. 6ounds often arise during the
(ibration *hich allo* for listening in and a subse4uent entrance to
the phase.

&raining
To practice/ *hile lying do*n" eyes closed" try to strain the entire
body *ithout using physical muscles for se(eral minutes. Tingling"
internal pressure" and a strain on the brain often occur during this
e&ercise. Remember to a(oid straining any real muscles. +f physical
strain occurs" results may be forfeited in the critical moment of
fruition.
@ISU6<IC6&IO,
closed. For three to fi(e seconds" con'ure an intense desire to see and
literally create a specific ob'ect. The ob'ect should be en(isioned at
rest" about four to eight inches from the practitioner. 2imit the
(isuali?ation to simple" familiar ob'ects" li!e an apple" flo*er" sphere"
or hand. 6ometimes it is useful to imagine an ob'ect floating 'ust
abo(e the eyebro*s instead of directly in front. +f nothing appears
during this period of time" a different techni4ue should be used.
+f an ob'ect appears" one should !eep loo!ing hard at it" and at a
certain moment one *ill reali?e that one is already standing ne&t to it
some*here in the *orld of the phase. 0hen the ob'ect becomes
realistic" one can also try to separate from oneFs body on oneFs o*n.

SE,SO:Y--O&O: @ISU6<IC6&IO,
closed. +magine acti(e" physical mo(ement for 1C to 1= seconds
*hile touching an actual ob'ect and simultaneously e&amining the
imagined details of the room. +f nothing appears during this period of
time" a different techni4ue should be used. +f real and imagined
sensations become mi&ed" then continue the practice until the
imagined sensations o(ercome the primary senses.
I-6#I,E) -O@E-E,&
closed. For = to 1C seconds" concentrate on (isuali?ing any of the
follo*ing actions/ *iggling" *al!ing" running" somersaulting" pulling
a rope" or s*imming. Try to imagine the mo(ement as a realistic and
acti(e e(ent during the practice period. +f nothing happens" a different
techni4ue should be employed. +f results occur in the form of the
sensation of mobility" the imagined mo(ement should be continued
until it becomes the dominant sensation. 0hen the mo(ement
achie(es primacy" it is accompanied by translocation to the phase. +f
such a translocation does not automatically occur" a separation
techni4ue is recommended.

I-6#I,E) SE,S6&IO,S
closed. For three to fi(e seconds" en(ision that a specific ob'ect is
being held in the hand. +f nothing happens" a different techni4ue
should be practiced. +f the impression of shape and *eight become
apparent" concentrate harder on the sensation" trying to compound the
e&perience. Once the ob'ectFs presence in the hand achie(es a
realistic 4uality" separation is possible. 8o*e(er" it is preferable to
continue handling the ob'ect. 3 practitioner is free to imagine any
type of ob'ect that fits in the hand. E&amples include a telephone" a
drin!ing glass" a remote control" a ball" a pen" or a bo&.
I-6#I,E) SOU,)S
pon a*a!ening" *ithout mo(ing or opening oneFs eyes" one
should acti(ely try to hear a specific sound or *ord" e.g. someoneFs
name or a melody. +f nothing happens" the techni4ue should be
changed for another one. +f sound arises" one should try to listen in to
it. 0hen it pea!s in (olume" one may try to separate.
EYE -O@E-E,&
closed. Perform t*o to fi(e sharp left%right or up%do*n eye
mo(ements. +f nothing happens" the techni4ue should be e&changed
for another. +f (ibrations occur" separation may be attempted after
efforts to intensify the (ibrations.
)O& O, &9E 2O:E9E6)
closed. For three to fi(e seconds" (isuali?e a point in the middle of
the forehead. +f nothing happens" a different techni4ue should be
used. +f (ibrations occur" they may be intensified by using this
techni4ue or by straining the brain" facilitating separation from the
body. 3lso" sounds may arise that allo* the practice of listening in.

2E6: -E&9O)
closed. For three to fi(e seconds" imagine something horrific and
gra(eyard%related staying nearby" something graphic" macabre" out of
the *orst nightmare imaginable. +f nothing happens" a different
techni4ue should be employed. 8o*e(er" acute fear may occur" most
li!ely forcing the practitioner into the phase *here a separation
techni4ue may be applied. 3lternati(ely" (ibrations or noise may arise
and allo* the use of other indirect techni4ues. 3 common problem
*ith the use of this techni4ue is that fear often ma!es the practitioner
so uncomfortable in the phase that he desires nothing else than to
return to *a!efulness.

:EC6<<I,# &9E P96SE S&6&E
closed. For three to fi(e seconds" recall the sensations that
accompanied a pre(ious phase e&perience. (This only *or!s if the
practitioner has achie(ed phase entrance in the past.) Either nothing
*ill happen and a different techni4ue should be used or these
sensations *ill be recalled and separating from the body may be tried
% if it doesnFt occur spontaneously. ;ibrations or noise may also arise
during this techni4ue" in *hich case listening in or straining the brain
may be practiced.
B:E6&9I,# CO,CE,&:6&IO,
closed. For three to fi(e seconds" focus on breathingJ the rise and fall
of the rib cage" the inflation and deflation of the lungs" the inta!e and
escape of air. +f no results occur" a different techni4ue should be used.
+f (ibrations" noise" or spontaneous separation occur" the practice of
this techni4ue should be intensified and used to its full ad(antage.
SE<EC&I,# &9E :I#9& &EC9,I=UES
The ne&t step to mastering indirect techni4ues is choosing the
right techni4ues that suit indi(idual predispositions. There is no point
in going for one techni4ue or another only because they loo!
interesting and because someone *rote a lot or spo!e a lot about
them. The choice should be based strictly upon *hat suits an
indi(idual practitioner.
Out of all of the enumerated primary indirect techni4ues"
practically only straining the brain *or!s easily and 4uic!ly for B=K
of practitioners. 3ll other techni4ues *or! immediately for only
about -=K to =CK of practitioners during initial training. 8o*e(er"
after se(eral training sessions" each techni4ue yields results for @=K
of engaged practitioners.
One *ay or another" e(ery practitioner should identify a certain
set of techni4ues that *or!s best. 3 set should consist of no less than
three techni4uesJ four or fi(e is e(en better to allo* more options and
practical combinations. )on%*or!ing techni4ues should not be
discarded *holesale by the indi(idual because they afford an
opportunity to achie(e success through ne*" pre(iously unresponsi(e
e&periences.
To ensure the correct selection of techni4ues" each should be
separately practiced o(er a period of at least three days. To this end"
one should e&periment *ith each of the primary techni4ues for - to
1C minutes before falling asleep" or e(en during the day. +t is good to
choose at least one secondary techni4ue practice. This regimen
allo*s a precise determination of the techni4ues that *ill yield the
best results for the practitioner. 9uring the process of selecting
personali?ed techni4ues" a practitioner learns and retains the
techni4ues in an intimate" personal *ay" *hich positi(ely affects ho*
techni4ues are used during critical moments.
+t is *orth noting that the final selection of techni4ues should be
(aried. For e&ample" choosing both straining the brain and straining
the body *ithout using muscles is pointless because they are
practically one and the same. More often than not" they *ill both
either *or! or not *or!. This is *hy techni4ues should in(ol(e
(arious types of sensory perception/ (isual" audio" !inesthetic"
(estibular" imaginary sense perception" and internal strain. Remember
that priorities and goals change *ith time" and that a techni4ue that
fell flat during initial attempts may une&pectedly pro(e (aluable later
on. 7e fle&ible. )o set of techni4ues should be car(ed in stone. +n
fact" the set may change se(eral times o(er the first fe* *ee!s as the
practitioner disco(ers *hat produces the best indi(idual results.
To close this section" a list has been pro(ided" detailing the most
effecti(e indirect techni4ues. This list *as compiled *ith classroom
data from the 6chool of Out%of%7ody Tra(el and may pro(e helpful in
determining an effecti(e set of indirect techni4ues.
&he -ost Effecti?e Indirect &echni'ues at School of Out-of-
Body &ra?el Seminars
Obser(ing +mages 1=K
Phantom 0iggling 1=K
2istening in 1=K
Rotation 1CK
6training the 7rain =K
6training the 7ody 0ithout sing Muscles =K
Forced Falling 3sleep =K
Mi&ture of Techni4ues 1CK
Other Techni4ues -CK
SEP6:6&IO, &EC9,I=UES
2et us begin *ith a totally shoc!ing fact/ during one%third of
successful indirect entries into the phase" it is not necessary to
perform any specific phase entry techni4ues" as separation techni4ues
are immediately successfulN This has been statistically pro(en at
6chool of Out%of%7ody Tra(el seminars and in the analyses of other
sources. .on(ersely" an incorrect understanding of separation
techni4ues may lead to undesirable conse4uences. +t is possible for a
practitioner to enter the phase state and be unable to separate from the
body. Therefore" it is (ery important to understand ho* separation
techni4ues *or! since they are often a !ey to success.
Interesting Fact!
Relatively often, a practitioner &ill try to e$ploy
separation techni4ues to no effect, ho&ever, he &ill
later une#pectedly understand that he had "een
lying in a different position than he sensed that he
&as in, and in fact, it had only "een necessary for
hi$ to stand up( This happens $ostly a$ong
"eginners and is indicative of an incorrect
understanding of separation techni4ues(

3t times a practitioner may only need to thin! about separation and
it happens. This is a rarity" *hich e&plains the e&istence of a *hole
series of au&iliary techni4ues. The most important separation
techni4ues are rolling out" getting up" climbing out" and le(itation.
:O<<I,# OU&
0hile a*a!ening" attempt to roll o(er to the edge of the bed or the
*all *ithout using any muscles. 9onFt *orry about falling out of bed"
hitting the *all" or be concerned *ith the details of ho* this
techni4ue should feel. Eust roll.
#E&&I,# UP
pon a*a!ening" attempt to get out of bed *ithout physical
e&ertion. This should be performed in a *ay that is most comfortable
for the practitioner.
C<I-BI,# OU&
0hile a*a!ening" try to climb out of the body *ithout using any
muscles. This techni4ue generally comes to mind *hen a partial
separation has been achie(ed through the use of other techni4ues" or
one part of the body has completely separated.

<E@I&6&IO,
pon a*a!ening" attempt to le(itate up*ard" parallel to the bed.
0hile attempting to le(itate" do not *onder ho* it should be
accomplishedJ e(eryone intuiti(ely !no*s ho* to le(itate from their
e&periences in dreams.
26<<I,# OU&
Practically the same as le(itation/ upon a*a!ening" try to sin!
do*n through the bed.
PU<<I,# OU&
8ere" upon a*a!ening" try to e&it the body through the head" as if
escaping from a lidded cocoon.

B6C>W6:)S :O<<
3fter a*a!ening" try to perform a bac!*ards somersault o(er the
head *ithout using any physical muscles.
BU<#E &9E EYESD
pon a*a!ening" bulge out or *iden the eyes *ithout opening
them. Frontal mo(ement to*ard separation may result.
6eparation techni4ues are united by a singular idea/ nothing
should be imagined" mo(ement should be attempted *ithout the use
of physical muscles. The techni4ues produce the same sensations of
mo(ement felt in real life. +f nothing happens immediately after
trying" then the techni4ue is not going to *or!" though it may deli(er
results at a later time. 3 practitioner *ill instantly be able to
recogni?e if the techni4ue has *or!ed. 8o*e(er" people are often
unprepared for the realness of the sensations and thin! that they are
ma!ing a physical mo(ement instead of reali?ing that a part or all of
the body has separated. 3fter this unfortunate failure" careful analysis
helps to understand *hat happened and plan for a successful retry.
+f separation *as incomplete or too! place *ith some difficulty"
this is a signal that the techni4ue is being performed correctly.
6trength and aggressi(e effort are re4uired from this point to achie(e
complete separation. For e&ample" if some mo(ement began and then
stopped after ha(ing made some progress" then one should go bac!
and mo(e e(en harder once again in the same direction.
+n order to practice separation techni4ues" lie do*n *ith the eyes
closed and attempt all of them o(er the course of se(eral minutes.
6eparation has li!ely been accomplished if no muscles t*itch or
strain and a sensation of mo(ement occurs. There *ill be a strong"
almost physically palpable internal effort to perform a mo(ement.
)aturally" no physical mo(ement actually occurs and the practitioner
remains prone and immobileJ ho*e(er" at the right moment" these
actions *ill lead to an easy entrance into the phase.
Interesting Fact!
%ppro#i$ately 17 to 87 of the ti$e that the phase
is practiced, one reali*es i$$ediately upon
a&a+ening that one has already separated( This
$eans that one $ay already go so$e&here and
stand, lie do&n, sit do&n, etc( This is not ho&ever
"eco$ing conscious in a drea$, "ut an actually
a&a+ening(
&9E BES& &I-E &O P:6C&ICE
The !ey to practice is the 4uantity and 4uality of attempts made
that hone a practitionerFs s!ills. There are se(eral *indo*s of time
best suited for employing indirect techni4ues.
To begin" it should be stated that sleep follo*s a cyclical pattern.
0e a*a!en e(ery hour%and%a%half and then 4uic!ly fall asleep again"
*hich gi(es rise to sleep cycles. Furthermore" *e e&perience t*o
primary stages of sleep/ rapid eye mo(ement (REM) sleep" and non%
rapid eye mo(ement ()REM) sleep. )REM sleep includes many
internal stages. The more *e sleep" the less the body needs deep
)REM sleep" and the more time *e spend in REM sleep. Phase
entrance is most li!ely to occur during REM sleep.

The best *ay to implement indirect techni4ues is by the deferred
$ethod. The aim of the method is to interrupt a sleep cycle during its
final stage and then disrupt it again after falling bac! to sleep" *hich
ma!es sleep light during the rest of the sleep cycle. 6leep
accompanied by fre4uent interruptions can be put to producti(e uses.
For e&ample" if a practitioner (letFs call him Eac!) goes to sleep at
midnight" then Eac! should set an alarm for > oFcloc! in the morning.
pon a*a!ening" Eac! should engage in some sort of physical
acti(ity" li!e going to the bathroom" getting a drin! of *ater" or
reading a fe* pages of this boo!. 3fter*ard" Eac! should go bac! to
bed thin!ing about ho*" *ithin the ne&t t*o to four hours" he *ill
*a!e up multiple times and ma!e an attempt to enter the phase
during each a*a!ening.
+f Eac! goes to bed earlier" then his alarm cloc! should be set bac!
by that amount of time" since si& hours of initial sleep is the optimal
length of time. +f Eac! sleeps less than si& hours" then the second half
of his nightFs sleep *ill be too deep. +f Eac! sleeps longer than si&
hours" then there *ill be little time remaining for attempts" or Eac!
may not e(en be able to fall asleep.
+f a practitioner naturally *a!es up in a forceful manner" it *ill be
difficult to regain sleep. Thus" it *ill not be necessary for the
practitioner to get out of bed *ith the aid of an alarm. The
practitioner should attempt to go right bac! to sleep.
)aturally" the deferred method is most applicable in cases *here
it is possible to sleep as long as a practitioner desires" *ithout ha(ing
to *a!e up early. )ot e(eryone en'oys such lu&ury on a daily basis"
but nearly e(eryone has days off *hen time may be set aside to
practice the deferred method. -t is in large $easure due to the
deferred $ethod that classroo$ courses at the School of Out-of-Body
Travel allo& up to 298 of class participants to enter the phase in the
course of a single &ee+end,
The second most effecti(e *indo* of time for entering the phase
is ordinary $orning a&a+ening( This generally occurs during light
slumber follo*ing a full nightFs sleep.
3nother effecti(e time to practice indirect techni4ues is after
a*a!ening from a daytime nap. Once again" this type of sleep *ill be
light and short" *hich pro(ides the body needed rest *hile allo*ing
memory and intention to be !ept intact through the moment of
a*a!ening. 3gain" not e(eryone has the lu&ury of ta!ing daytime
naps" but if such a chance arises" then it *ould be (ery beneficial to
ta!e ad(antage of the opportunity.
/ightti$e a&a+enings are the least effecti(e times for phase
e&perimentation because the brain still re4uires a lot of deep sleep at
this time. 3*a!ening at night" the mind is 4uite *ea! and hardly
capable of any effort. E(en if some results are obser(ed" a*a!ening
often ends *ith 4uic!ly falling bac! asleep. This is not to say that
normal practice of the phase cannot occur at nightJ it 'ust *onFt be as
effecti(e as at other times. The nighttime option is best for those *ho
lac! an opportunity to use other *indo*s of time for practicing the
phase.
nderstand that *e a*a!en at night e(ery BC minutes" *hich is
*hy a minimum of four a*a!enings is almost guaranteed *hen
sleeping" e(en for 'ust si& hours. 0hen the practitioner !no*s about
this and stri(es to sei?e those moments" *ith time he *ill actually
sei?e them and ta!e ad(antage of them.
CO,SCIOUS 6W6>E,I,#
:onscious a&a+ening is *a!ing up *ith a particular thought in
mindJ ideally" a thought about indirect techni4ues. +n order to start
using indirect techni4ues upon a*a!ening" it is not sufficient to ha(e
a cursory !no*ledge of the techni4ues to be used *hen *a!ing. 9ue
to the peculiarities of the human mind and its habits" it is not al*ays
easy *hen *a!ing to recall any particular moti(e or idea. The goal of
conscious a*a!ening is to practice instant action *ithout being idle
after *a!ing up.
Interesting Fact!
There e#ists a "elief that the pheno$enon of out-
of-"ody travel is practically unattaina"le, and is
accessi"le only to an elect fe& through practices
that re4uire secret +no&ledge( 0o&ever, the
greatest difficulty &hen trying to e#perience out-of-
"ody travel in a short period of ti$e lies only in
i$$ediately re$e$"ering a"out the techni4ues
upon a&a+ening &ithout $oving( This is all si$ple
and straightfor&ard( But it is precisely this trifle
that is the largest stu$"ling "loc+ &hen trying to
e#perience such an unco$$on pheno$enon(
This is not difficult at all for appro&imately -=K of the
population. 8o*e(er" for the other three%4uarters of the population"
this is an difficult barrier to entry that can e(en seem insurmountable.
+f such thoughts arise" one should simply understand that this cannot
be so" and that persistent attempts and training are the !ey solution.
The reasons *hy people are unable to remember practicing the
phase upon a*a!ening are/ not being in the habit of immediately
doing anything upon a*a!ening" a desire to sleep longer" a desire to
go to the bathroom" being thirsty" a desire to suddenly start sol(ing
day%to%day problems" and so on.
.onscious a*a!ening *ith the intent of attempting an indirect
techni4ue should be a practitionerFs primary goal" *hich should be
pursued at e(ery cost. The speed at *hich the phase is learned and
e&perienced depends on this.
There are se(eral effecti(e tric!s to learning conscious
a*a!ening/
-ntention upon falling asleep' This is the (ery important to
successfully achie(ing conscious a*a!ening. 3 (ery clear scientific
fact has been pro(en by somnologists (scientists *ho study sleep)/
upon a*a!ening" people usually thin! about *hat they had been
thin!ing about before falling asleep. This phenomenon is easy to
obser(e if the sleeper is e&perience a serious life problemJ they fall
asleep *ith the problem and *a!e *ith it. 6o" in a case li!e this" if
difficulties at the front of the mind are replaced *ith a desire to
practice the phase" this *ill produce the desired effect. +t is not
necessary to thin! solely about conscious a*a!ening *hile falling
asleep. +t is sufficient to simply affirm the intention clearly and
distinctly" e(en state the intention out loud. Practicing these types of
conscious actions *hile entering sleep *ill do much to promote the
success of indirect techni4ues upon a*a!ening.
;eneral intent' The more clearly a practitioner concentrates on the
importance and necessity of *a!ing up and immediately
remembering to practice the techni4ues" the more solid the intent *ill
become" and the more li!ely the process *ill fulfill its role and
actually lead to results.
%ffir$ing desires' 6ometimes an internal intention is simply not
enough for some people" or they are unable to properly affirm one by
(irtue of indi(idual characteristics. +n this case" an affirmation of
desires should be introduced at the physical le(el. This could be in
the form of a note *ith a description of a goal placed ne&t to the bed"
under oneFs pillo*" or hung on the *all. +t could be a con(ersation
*ith friends or family about the particular desire" or by repeatedly
(ocali?ing the actions that need to be performed upon a*a!ening. +t
could e(en be an entry in a diary" blog" or te&ting on a mobile phone.
%naly*ing unsuccessful a&a+enings( 3naly?ing unsuccessful
attempts at conscious a*a!ening is e&tremely important. 0hen
remembering the failed attempt after se(eral minutes" se(eral hours"
or e(en later in the day" focus on it and resol(e to succeed during the
ne&t attempt. 9eep e&ploration of the failure is highly effecti(e and
practical since the practitioner is learning *hat *or!s" *hat doesnFt
*or!" and ma!ing healthy resolutions to*ard success.
:reating $otivation' The greater the desire to enter into the phase
to accomplish a goal there" the 4uic!er successful conscious
a*a!ening is achie(ed. Moti(ation is be created by a great desire to
do or e&perience something in the phase. +n general" pre(ious (isits to
the phase are great moti(ation" but an uninitiated person does not
!no* it and *ill need something to *hich they can relate. For some"
this could be a childhood dream of flying to Mars" for others it could
be the opportunity to see a lo(ed one *ho has passed a*ay" for
another it could be the chance to obtain specific information" or
influence the course of a physical illness" and so forth.
3side from natural methods to achie(e conscious a*a!ing" there
are (arious de(ices and tools that facilitate a measure of success.
These *ill be co(ered in .hapter = in the section describing non%
autonomous *ays of entering the phase.
The "est $o$ent for conscious a&a+ening is &hile e#iting a
drea$( This is the $ost effective and productive ti$e to atte$pt
separation or perfor$ing the techni4ues( 3t this moment" physical
a*areness of the body is at a minimum. 3*areness at the (ery end of
a dream often occurs after nightmares" painful e&periences in the
dream" falling dreams I any dream that causes a sudden a*a!ening.
0ith time" one should de(elop a refle& that enables one to
perform planned actions at the moment of a*a!ening" but *hen
consciousness itself has not yet had time to return. This type of refle&
is highly beneficial to sei?ing the most fruitful of opportunities to
enter the phase.
9ue to (arious psychological and physiological factors" it is not
possible for e(ery person to achie(e conscious a*a!ening after e(ery
sleep cycle. Thus" there is no point in becoming upset if conscious
a*a!ening does not occur e(ery time. E&periencing only - to :
a*a!enings per day is normalJ this is sufficient enough to attempt
phase entrance - to = times per *ee! *hen practiced daily.
+t is not *orth getting carried a*ay *ith an e&cessi(e number of
attempts. 9uring the 6choolFs courses" it has been noted that doing 1C
conscious a*a!enings or more (some students try -C or e(en :C) o(er
the course of one night and morning rarely yields results. This is due
to the fact that if one sets oneself a goal that is desired so much that
its reali?ation brea!s the natural rhythms of the body" one depri(es
oneself of the intermediate" transitional states that ma!e the phase
effecti(e. 3 practitioner may also 4uic!ly become emotionally
e&hausted from the large number of attempts and be unable to push
limits in the right direction. The upside is that one *ill simply tire
out. +f that starts to happen" it is better to calm do*n and try to
approach the matter in a more rela&ed manner" e(enly and gradually.
6W6>E,I,# WI&9OU& -O@I,#
3longside remembering the phase immediately upon *a!ing"
another important re4uirement is a*a!ening *ithout mo(ing" *hich
is difficult since many people *a!e up and mo(e. pon a*a!ening"
scratching" stretching" opening the eyes" and listening to real sounds
should be a(oided. 3ny real mo(ement or perception *ill (ery
4uic!ly disintegrate the intermediate state and introduce reality" the
acti(ation of the mind and its connection to the sensory organs.
3t first" a*a!ening *ithout mo(ing seems difficult or e(en
impossible. 8o*e(er" it has been pro(en that this is remedied for
through acti(e attempts and the desire to achie(e set goals. People
often claim that they cannot a*a!en *ithout mo(ing" that itFs an
impossible e&perience. 8o*e(er" after se(eral attempts" it *ill
happen" and it *ill occur more and more fre4uently *ith practice.
Thus" if there is difficulty in a*a!ening *ithout mo(ement" do
not despair" 'ust !eep trying. 6ooner or later" the body *ill yield to
the practice" and e(erything *ill happen smoothly.
3*a!ening *ithout mo(ing is (ery important because" for the
ma'ority of people" e&periments *ith the phase are not possible
e&cept in the first *a!ing moments *here *a!ing *ithout mo(ing
sets the stage for successful indirect techni4ue cycles. Often" a
practitioner *ill ma!e 1C unsuccessful attempts and mo(e *hile
a*a!ening. Once the practitioner learns to consistently *a!e calmly
and gradually" success 4uic!ly follo*s.
8o*e(er" if an a*a!ening is conscious" but *ith mo(ement" that
does not mean that the practitioner cannot immediately ma!e an
attempt to fall into the phase. 6uch attempts" although they *ill be
about = times less effecti(e than usual" should ne(ertheless be made
3ny opportunity to practice *hile *a!ing should not be *asted. +t
must only be !ept in mind that one must first neutrali?e the effects of
the mo(ement in order to once again fall into an intermediate state. +n
the case of mo(ement" it is e&tremely helpful to begin practice *ith
forced falling asleep. 2istening in also *or!s *ell" as does obser(ing
images and phantom *iggling" each performed passi(ely for =%1=
seconds" instead of the standard duration of : to = seconds. 3fter
performing these" cycling may begin.
3*a!ening *ithout mo(ement" despite all its importance" is not a
goal in and of itself" and also not *orth suffering o(er. 0hen
a*a!ening" if there is great discomfort" something itches" a need to
s*allo* arises" or any manner of natural refle&" it is better to deal
*ith it and then act according to practices recommended *hen
mo(ement upon a*a!ening happens.
)ot all mo(ements upon a*a!ening are real and" if only for this
reason alone" *hen mo(ement occurs" indirect techni4ues should
follo*.

Interesting Fact!
<p to 27 of sensations and actions that happen
upon a&a+ening are not real as they see$, "ut are
phanto$(

False sensations occur in *idely di(erse *ays. People often do not
understand *hat is going on *ith them *ithout ha(ing e&perienced
the phase. For e&ample" a person may thin! they are scratching their
ear *ith their physical hand *hen they are really using a phantom
hand. 3 person may hear pseudo%sounds in the room" on the street" or
at the neighborFs *ithout noting anything unusual. Or" a person may
loo! around the room *ithout !no*ing that their eyes are actually
closed. +f a practitioner recogni?es such moments for *hat they are"
they may immediately try to separate from the body.
CYC<ES O2 I,)I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
Thus far" indirect techni4ues used for phase entrance and
techni4ues for separation in the phase ha(e been co(ered. .onscious
a*a!ening and the best times to practice it ha(e also been e&amined.
)o*" a specific algorithm of action for indirect techni4ues *ill be
presented. Follo*ing this algorithm promises 4uic! and practical
results.
3lgorithm of 3ction upon 3*a!ening/
!. &esting Searation &echni'ues 8ithin + Seconds
2i!e the pre(ious obser(ation of separation techni4ues" a third of
successful attempts *ith indirect techni4ues yield immediate success
upon the attempt of a separation techni4ue due to the fact that the
first seconds after *a!ing up are the most useful for entering the
phase. The less time that has elapsed after a*a!ening" the better.
.on(ersely" if one lies do*n e&pecting something to happen" chances
4uic!ly dissipate.
Thus" upon a*a!ening" preferably *ithout first mo(ing" a
practitioner should immediately try (arious separation techni4ues"
li!e rolling out" getting up" or le(itation. +f a techni4ue suddenly
started to yield results for appro&imately for = seconds" then
separation from the body should be attempted. 6ometimes inertia"
difficulty" or a barrier *ill arise during a separation attempt. )o
attention should be gi(en to these problems. +nstead" resol(e to
separate % decidedly and aggressi(ely climb out of the body.
Deep in mind that trying to immediately separate upon a*a!ening
is a s!ill of the utmost importanceJ one that is *orth honing from the
(ery beginning" ne(er forgotten.
%. &he Cycle of Indirect &echni'ues to Use if One is Una3le to
Searate
+f separation does not occur after se(eral seconds" it most li!ely
means that separation *ill not occur" regardless of elapsed time in
effort. This is *here the practitioner must resort to other techni4ues.
The practitioner should already ha(e chosen a minimum of three
primary or secondary techni4ues that suit a practical repertoire. 8ere
is *here the techni4ues are put into action.
/ota Bene, -n order to give a specific e#a$ple, &e &ill e#a$ine
the use of three specific techni4ues, &hich should "e replaced &ith a
tested and chosen set of techni4ues( The follo*ing operational
techni4ues ha(e been used as e&amples/ obser(ing images (a)"
phantom *iggling (b)" and listening in (c).
3fter an unsuccessful attempt at separating" the practitioner
immediately starts obser(ing the (oid behind the eyes. +f images
begin to appear *ithin : to = seconds" obser(ation should continue
*ithout scrutini?ing the images in detail" or the image *ill e(aporate.
3s a result of this action" the image *ill 4uic!ly become more and
more realistic and colorful" engulfing the practitioner. +f e(erything
comes together correctly" a sudden translocation into the picture *ill
occur" or" *hen the picture becomes (ery realistic" attempt to separate
from the body. +f nothing happens after : to = seconds" then the
practitioner should transition to the techni4ue of phantom *iggling.
For : to = seconds" the practitioner 4uic!ly searches the entire
body for a part that can be *iggled. Or" the entire period of time is
spent in an attempt to *iggle a specific body part/ a finger" hand" or
leg. +f the desired effect occurs" then the practitioner should continue
*ith the techni4ue and achie(e the ma&imum possible range of
mo(ement. 9uring this process" a number of things can happen"
including spontaneous separation" a successful separation attempt"
free mo(ement of the *iggled part" or the presence of sound or
(ibrations. 3ll of these e(ents are of great ad(antage. +f nothing
*iggles o(er the course of : to = seconds" then the practitioner should
mo(e on to listening in.
The practitioner should try to detect an internal sound. +f the
sound is there" listen and try to amplify it. 3s a result" the noise may
gro* into a roar and spontaneous separation *ill occur" separating
through the use of a techni4ue *ill be possible" or (ibrations *ill
occur. +f no noise occurs o(er the course of : to = seconds" then the
entire cycle should be repeated.
+t is beneficial to e&amine the reason behind the use of a set of
three indirect techni4ues. This is moti(ated by the fact that the body
often reacts to techni4ues in (ery peculiar *ays. 0ith one person" a
techni4ue may *or! one day and not *or! on another day" *hich is
*hy if only one techni4ue is used" e(en a (ery good techni4ue that
*or!s often" a practitioner can miss out on a lot of different
e&perience through the lac! of (ariety in practice. Thus" a practical
repertoire should consist of se(eral techni4ues.
Interesting Fact!
So$eti$es, the first techni4ue that &or+s for a
practitioner never results in a repeat of phase
entrance again, although other techni4ues that
&ere not i$$ediately effective at the novice stages
of practice later "egin to &or+ regularly and
successfully(
(. :eeating the Cycle of Indirect &echni'ues
+f the first cycle of : techni4ues does not yield any clear results"
this does not mean that all is lost. E(en if the techni4ues do not *or!"
they still dra* the practitioner closer to the phase state and it is
simply necessary to continue using the techni4ues by again obser(ing
pictures" phantom *iggling" and listening in I and repeating this
process at least three times.
8a(ing performed one cycle of techni4ues" one can easily go on
to doing a second cycle" a third one" a fourth one" and so on. +t is
4uite probable that during one of these cycles" a techni4ue *ill
suddenly pro(e itself" e(en though it had not been *or!ing at all 'ust
a fe* seconds beforehand.
3 serious practitioner should commit to a minimum of < cycles.
The problem lies in the fact that it is psychologically difficult to do
something that has sho*n itself not to *or!" and one may gi(e up
ta!ing further action" e(en though one could be at the cusp of falling
into the phase. Deep trying" and then try again" and againH There ha(e
been cases *here it too! t*enty cycles to produce results. 3
monumental effort" yes" but one *orth the outcome.
*. 2alling 6slee 8ith the Possi3ility of &rying 6gain.
+f a practitioner is unable to enter the phase after performing
cycles and attempts to separate" or e(en if e(erything *or!ed out" it
is still better to go bac! to sleep to facilitate subse4uent attempts.
3gain" it is (ery important to go to sleep *ith a clearly defined
intention of actually performing the cycles upon a*a!ening. 6uch
intention (astly increases the probability that the ne&t attempt *ill
occur soon. That is" one should not fall asleep *ith an empty head
and the desire to simply get a good nightFs sleep. +f using the deferred
method" then clear intention is mandatory" as se(eral attempts are
possible o(er the course of a sleep cycle.
E(en if only a fe* attempts are made accompanied by decided and
concentrated effort" then the four steps described in the algorithm *ill
undoubtedly produce entrance into the phase.
+n order to more effecti(ely use the system of indirect cycles" it is
necessary to discuss *hat to do if one techni4ue *or!s and progress
ceases during the cycle and phase entry does not occur.
First" understand that if a techni4ue has begun to *or!" only lac!
of e&perience and s!ill *ill pre(ent the phase.
6econd" barriers are o(ercome by temporarily s*itching to other
techni4ues. 2et us suppose that noise arising *hen listening in gro*s
louder and louder and then pea!s in (olume. +t *ould surely be
beneficial to s*itch to forced falling asleep or obser(ing images for
se(eral seconds" and then return to listening in. The sound may then
become much louder and pro(ide an opportunity to proceed *ith the
techni4ue. 6ometimes" it ma!es sense to brea! off se(eral times into
(arious techni4ues and then return to the primary techni4ue that
yielded some results.
+t is often possible to simultaneously perform t*o or e(en three
techni4ues and e&perience no negati(e effect to results. +t is also
normal and natural to s!ip around from techni4ue to techni4ue"
de(iating from a specific plan of action. For e&ample" sounds often
arise during phantom *iggling. +n this case" a practitioner may 'ust
simply s*itch o(er to listening in. Other oft%encountered results
pairings are/ images from sound" sound from rotation" sound from
straining the brain" a strain on the brain from listening in" (ibrations
from rotation" (ibrations from phantom *iggling" and so forth.
3uring initial atte$pts at using cycles of indirect techni4ues, the
pro"le$ of confusion during a critical $o$ent $ay arise, &hen a
novice practitioner suddenly forgets e#actly &hat to do and ho& to
do it( This is nor$al, and the solution is to i$$ediately do &hatever
co$es to $ind( Results can "e achieved in this $anner( 5hen a
practitioner is $ore rela#ed a"out the practice, such pro"le$s &ill
no longer occur(
9I,&S 2:O- &9E -I,)
;aried cycles of indirect techni4ues is an almost mandatory
precondition for getting the best result. There are some e&ceptions.
6ometimes" through indirect indicators" a practitioner may be
inclined to begin *ith certain techni4ues" regardless of *hat had been
planned. These are a sort of hint from the body and the ability to use
such cues plays an e&tremely important role in the use of indirect
techni4ues because they enable a practitioner to substantially increase
the effecti(eness of practice.
9int ,o. !D Images
+f the practitioner becomes a*are upon a*a!ening that some
images" pictures" or remnants from dreams are before him" then he
should immediately proceed to the techni4ue of obser(ing images"
*ith all of the results that arise from it. +f this does not lead to
anything" then cycling *ith a set of techni4ues should begin.
9int ,o. %D ,oises
+f the practitioner reali?es upon a*a!ening that he hears an
internal noise" roaring" ringing" *histling" and so forth" then he
should immediately begin from the techni4ue of listening in. +f this
has no effect" then cycles of indirect techni4ues ought to commence.

9int ,o. (D @i3rations
+f a practitioner feels (ibrations throughout the body *hile
a*a!ening" they should be amplified through the use of straining the
brain or straining the body *ithout using muscles. 0hen the
(ibrations reach their pea!" the practitioner can try to separate. +f
nothing happens after se(eral attempts" indirect techni4ue cycles
should start.

9int ,o. *D ,um3ness
+f a practitioner *a!es to numbness in a body part" phantom
*iggling of that part should be attempted. +f no result is achie(ed
after se(eral attempts" cycling should be tried. Of course" it is better
to refrain from techni4ues if the numbness is (ery intense and causes
substantial discomfort.
6##:ESSIO, 6,) P6SSI@I&Y
9uring the practice of indirect techni4ues" including techni4ue
cycles" unsuccessful attempts may result in falling asleep or
becoming completely a*a!e. These results indicate a deficiency or
e&cess of aggression.
+f a practitioner usually falls asleep *hile attempting to enter the
phase" then more aggressi(e action is needed *hile performing
indirect techni4ues. +f" on the other hand" most attempts end in a full
and alert a*a!ening" then aggression should be curbed and
techni4ues should be conducted more slo*ly and in a more rela&ed
manner. 7alance bet*een passi(ity and aggression is imperati(eJ the
phase state is easily attained by those practitioners *ho find a stable
medium bet*een passi(ity and aggression.
The issue of aggression re4uires a closer e&amination. =uite
often, atte$pts at indirect techni4ues are $ade leisurely, &ithout
desire or real effort, to >chec+ the$ off the list?( Results $ore easily
reali*ed if the practitioner possesses an aggressive desire to enter the
phase( More often than not, practitioners lac+ aggressive desire,
instead of having too $uch of it( Thus, each effort re4uires a distinct
&ant to succeed(
S&:6&E#Y 2O: 6C&IO,
6ome mista!enly belie(e that indirect techni4ues *ill produce
4uic!" easy results" li!e a pill. 9espite the fact that the techni4ues
described in this guideboo! are the best means to entering the phase"
strong effort still needs to be e&erted. This is not important for some"
as e(erything comes 4uite easily to them" but for others this is of
great importance.
+ndirect techni4ues *ill definitely *or! if practiced consistently
and as described. +t has already been noted that in the ma'ority of
cases" ma!ing se(eral concentrated attempts upon a*a!ening *ithout
mo(ement is sufficient enough to produce results. +t may ta!e a lot of
time and effort to achie(e phase entrance" so practitioners *ho set
goals and *or! diligently *ill be presented *ith a cro*n of success.
3ttempts are important in large measure not only for the final
result" but also for the process itself. 9uring practice" the practitioner
independently learns and sol(es issues that may not ha(e been
understood in the guideboo!. Other times" the practitioner *ill
encounter situations that ha(e ne(er been described at all. +tFs
impossible to prepare a student for e(ery possible scenario" so as a
practitioner mo(es deeper into practice" a uni4ue" indi(idual
perspecti(e and portfolio of e&periences de(elops" *hich *ill
certainly pro(e useful in the future. ntil then" diligent practice of the
information presented in this boo! *ill ready a practitioner for that
personal frontier.
3ctions in practice re4uire strict attention. 6tudy the techni4ues
and selects those that *or! best. 6et the goal of consistent" conscious
*a!ing *ithout mo(ement. Ma!e an ob'ecti(e of performing cycles
of indirect techni4ues *hile *a!ing up" day in and day out. 5ith such
a clear course of action, the practitioner should never defocus his
attention or dissipate his energy on other related actions, li+e, for
e#a$ple, on direct techni4ues for entering the phase( +f the indirect
techni4ues do not *or! in the course of se(eral days" continue trying.
The latest results occur in a matter of *ee!s" not months or years"
li!e some sources maintain. 5oals are meant to be stubbornly
pursued" step%by%step" firmly" and diligently.
+f no results occur after 1C to -C days" it is better to cease practice
for a *ee! and ta!e a rest" and then return *ith a fresh resol(e to
master the practice. +nterestingly enough" it is e&actly during such a
brea! that spontaneous entrances into the phase through the most
di(erse methods occur.
+f success is still elusi(e e(en after 1 to - months of trying" then a
thorough analysis of the regimen should be conducted to root out any
ob(ious mista!es or deficiencies. +f o(ercoming them pro(es difficult
or impossible" s*itching o(er to direct techni4ues is not
recommended since they pro(e much more difficult than indirect
techni4ues. +nstead" techni4ues for entering the phase through
conscious dreaming should be practiced.
+t is also not *orth s!ipping o(er problematic areas and trying to
ma!e up for mista!es by e&pending e(en more effort. For e&ample"
ignoring the precondition of a*a!ening *ithout mo(ing *ill pro(e
fruitless. 7ypassing this re4uirement *or!s for (ery fe* people.
Facing e(ery problem head%on and *or!ing hard to brea! through
*ill be richly re*arded *ith an unforgettable" treasured e&periences.
Deep tryingH
&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES
WI&9 I,)I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
+nternal certainty that nothing *ill happen instead of belie(ing in
positi(e results.
6topping the performance of techni4ues after an unsuccessful
cycle *hen a minimum of four cycles should be practiced.
.onstantly a*a!ening to mo(ement instead of remaining still.
Performing direct techni4ues in the e(ening. Total concentration
on indirect techni4ues is re4uired from the morning on if a
practitionerFs goal is access to the phase.
Performing indirect techni4ues for an e&tremely long period of
time (- minutes or more). This is a complete *aste of time in most
cases.
6*itching from techni4ues that ha(e begun to *or! *hen
practice should be follo*ed through to the end.
Passi(ely performing techni4ues instead of being determined and
aggressi(e.
Performing each techni4ue separately for too long a period of
time" e(en if the techni4ue does not *or!" instead of s*itching to
another techni4ue *ithin se(eral seconds.
E&cessi(e thin!ing and analysis *hile performing indirect
techni4ues" *hich re4uire mental tran4uility and inner stillness.
6topping and concentrating on unusual sensations *hen they
arise (ersus continuing the techni4ue that brought them about in the
first place.
E&tremely long anticipation upon a*a!ening instead of
immediately performing techni4ues.
Premature attempts at separating" instead of performing phase
creation techni4ues through to the end of progress.
8olding the breath *hen unusual sensations appear. 7e calm
instead.
Opening the eyes *hen the only recommended mo(ement is
breathing or mo(ing the eyes behind closed lids.
7eing agitated instead of rela&ed.
.easing attempts to separate e(en *hen partial success is met.
6training the physical muscles *hile performing the techni4ues
(ersus remaining physically motionless.
)ot practicing after an alert a*a!ening" *hen techni4ues are best
applied % especially in the e(ent of *a!ing *ithout mo(ement.
Merely imagining the techni4ues instead of really understanding
them and performing them" if" of course" one is not performing
rotation or other imagined techni4ues.
6imply *iggling phantom limbs instead of employing a fi&ed
determination to increase the range of mo(ement
Falling right asleep during forced falling asleep" instead of ha(ing
the firm intention of continuing efforts *ithin only = to 1C seconds.
6crutini?ing the details of images *hen using the techni4ue of
obser(ing imagesJ the *hole image should be obser(ed
panoramically lest it disappear.
+ntentionally trying to force pictures *hen obser(ing images"
instead of loo!ing for *hat is naturally presented.
6imply hearing noise *hen employing the techni4ue of listening
in" instead of attenti(ely trying to pay attention" catch something" and
listen in.
Exercises for Chater %
=uestions
1. 0hy are indirect techni4ues the easiest1
-. 0hy *ill one techni4ue *or! for some people and not for
others1
:. 8o* many attempts are necessary in order to enter the phase1
<. 0hen obser(ing images" should a picture be con'ured1
=. 8o* is phantom *iggling different from imagined
mo(ement1
>. 0here does sound come from *hile listening in1
@. 8o* is forced listening in different from normal listening in1
A. 0hen employing the techni4ue of rotation" should one try to
rotate or simply imagine the rotation1
B. 0hat is physically strained *hen using the techni4ue of
straining the brain1
1C. 8o* is straining the brain different from straining the body
*ithout using muscles1
11. 6hould a practitioner fall asleep *hen using the forced falling
asleep techni4ue1
1-. 3ccording to statistics from classes held at the 6chool of Out%
of%7ody Tra(el" *hich indirect techni4ues are the most effecti(e1
1:. 0hy should one practice all of the primary techni4ues in a
rela&ed state1
1<. 0hat helps practitioners to enter the phase one%third of the
time *hile using indirect techni4ues1
1=. +s le(itation the most popular separation techni4ue1
1>. 0hat is the essential difference bet*een indirect techni4ues
and separation techni4ues1
1@. 8o* does the separation techni4ue of rolling out differ from
the indirect techni4ue of rotation1
1A. +s it necessary to imagine anything *hile trying to separate1
1B. 0hen is the best time to use indirect techni4ues1
-C. .an techni4ues that are traditionally used upon a*a!ening be
attempted during the day1 8o* effecti(e are these techni4ues
during the day1
-1. +s becoming consciousness *hile dreaming the same as
conscious a*a!ening1
--. 0hen employing indirect techni4ues" does an inability to
a*a!en *ithout mo(ing ha(e an effect on oneGs practice1
-:. 0hat are the components of the algorithm of cycling indirect
techni4ues1
-<. 0hat first step must be ta!en *hile cycling through indirect
techni4ues1
-=. 8o* many different techni4ues should a cycle consist of1
->. 0hat is the minimum number of cycles that must be
practiced1
-@. +f a lot of time has passed after a*a!ening" is this good or bad
for cycles of indirect techni4ues1
-A. 0hat must be done if a techni4ue gets stuc! at an
unsatisfactory le(el of results1
-B. +f the cycles do not *or!" *hat should be done1
:C. 0hat are hints from the mind1
:1. +n *hat cases is it necessary to introduce aggressi(e effort
*hen performing indirect techni4ues1
&as$s
1. Try all of the primary indirect techni4ues *hile in a rela&ed
state and single out : to = techni4ues that seem to *or!. Repeat
such training another couple of times on other days.
-. Try all of the separation techni4ues in a rela&ed state.
:. 3chie(e one conscious a*a!ening follo*ed by cycles of
indirect techni4ues.
<. 3chie(e one conscious a*a!ening *ithout any physical
mo(ement and attempt an indirect techni4ue.
=. pon a*a!ening *ithout mo(ing" perform a full cycle of
indirect techni4ues" and repeat this e&ercise until phase entrance
is achie(ed.
Chater ( " )irect &echni'ues
&9E CO,CEP& O2 )I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
3irect techni4ues for entering into an out-of-"ody e#perience are
used &ithout the prere4uisite of sleep@ "y perfor$ing specific actions
&hile lying do&n &ith the eyes closed( The ad(antage of direct
techni4ues is that" in theory" they can be performed at any moment.
8o*e(er" a large dra*bac! e&ists in the length of time it ta!es to
master the techni4ues. Only =CK of practitioners achie(e success
after ma!ing daily attempts o(er a period of : to > *ee!s. For some"
an entire year may pass before results are reali?ed. The difficulty in
achie(ing results *ith direct techni4ues is not a problem of
inaccessibility" but the natural psychological characteristics of the
indi(idual. )ot e(eryone is able to clearly understand the specific
nuances in(ol(ed" *hich is *hy some *ill continually ma!e
mista!es.
Many practitioners stri(e to master direct techni4ues right a*ay
because they appear to be the most con(enient" straightfor*ard" and
concrete techni4ues. 8o*e(er" it is a gra(e mista!e to begin
attempting and mastering phase entrance from this le(el. +n BCK of
cases *here no(ices begin their training *ith direct techni4ues"
failure is guaranteed. Moreo(er" a (ast amount of time" effort" and
emotion *ill be *asted. 3s a result" complete disillusionment *ith
the entire sub'ect of phase e&periences is possible.
3irect techni4ues should only "e practiced after $astery of the
easiest indirect techni4ues or ho& to "eco$e conscious &hen
drea$ing( -n any case, difficulties &ill not &ear one do&n
after&ards, as it &ill "e e#ceedingly clear fro$ oneAs o&n e#perience
that the phase is not a fig$ent of the i$agination( %lso, an advanced
+no&ledge of indirect techni4ues &ill $a+e it considera"ly easier to
achieve direct entry into the phase(
Ouality of the phase e&perience is not dependent upon the chosen
entrance techni4ue. 9irect techni4ues do not necessarily pro(ide a
deeper" more lasting phase o(er indirect techni4ues.
9irect techni4ues are better suited for some practitioners and not
others" but this ban only be said for a minority of the practicing
population. Mean*hile" indirect techni4ues are accessible to
absolutely e(eryone all of the time.
+f a practitioner has decides to begin practice *ith direct
techni4ues or has gained the necessary e&perience *ith indirect
techni4ues" the underlying principles of the techni4ues must still be
learned. 0ithout these" nothing *ill occur" e&cept coincidentally and
in rare cases. The !ey to the successful use of direct techni4ues rests
in achie(ing a free%floating state of consciousness. 8o*e(er" *e *ill
first e&amine a large (ariety of (ery useful aspects and factors that
ma!e direct entry into the phase much easier.
First" *e *ill e&amine *hen it is best to perform the techni4ues
and ho* intensi(ely to e&ercise their practice. Then" *e *ill e&amine
the (ery important factor of body position" and the no less crucial
issue of ho* long the techni4ues should be performed. Then" *e *ill
briefly in(estigate the issue of rela&ation" and then *e *ill
immediately mo(e on to the actual direct techni4ues. Only after
co(ering all of the abo(e are *e able to del(e into the issue of *hat a
free%floating state of consciousness is and ho* to achie(e it.
&9E BES& &I-E &O P:6C&ICE
The issue of time is not important *ith indirect techni4ues since
the ma'or prere4uisite is that they are performed immediately after
a*a!ening occurs. +n the case of direct techni4ues" the issue of
timing is much more critical.
)aturally" the best method for finding the right time to perform
direct techni4ues is the same as indirect techni4ues I the deferred
$ethod. 8o*e(er" there are some serious differences here. First of
all" one may interrupt oneFs sleep at practically anytime of the night
or early morning. 6econd" after ha(ing *o!en up (=%1= min.)" one
should not fall bac! asleep" but should immediately proceed to the
techni4ues.
9irect techni4ues are many times more effecti(e *ith the deferred
method than at any other time. This is due to the fact that *ith the
deferred method" the mind does not ha(e time to become 1CCK alert"
and it is easy to fall into the altered state of consciousness that *ill
allo* results.
0hen it comes to specific steps" one should a*a!en in the middle
of the night either on oneGs o*n or *ith the help of an alarm cloc!.
Then" one should get up and do something for : to 1C minutes" and
then lie do*n again in bed and perform the techni4ues. +f it is
probable that the practitioner *ill *a!e up in too alert a state" and
thus not e(en be sleepy" then the inter(al bet*een a*a!ening and
performing the direct techni4ue should be shortened" and fe*er
things should be done during that period of time. +t should be noted
that *ith this setup" a free%floating state of mind plays a far lesser
role that *ith other procedures.
The second most effecti(e *indo* of time is "efore falling asleep
at night" *hen the practitioner goes to bed. 9uring this period of
time" the brain needs to shut do*n the body and mind in order to
rene* its strength" *hich has been e&pended o(er the course of the
day. This natural process can be ta!en ad(antage of by introducing
certain ad'ustments to it.
3ttempts at performing direct techni4ues during the day are less
effecti(e. 8o*e(er" if fatigue has already had a chance to build up by
this time" this can be ta!en ad(antage of because the body *ill try to
fall into sleep. This is especially suited for those *ho are accustomed
to napping during the day.
5enerally" other *indo*s of time produce a substantially *orse
result" *hich is *hy one should start *ith performing direct
techni4ues in the middle of the night" or before a nightGs sleep. Only
after such techni4ues ha(e been mastered *ill it be possible to
e&periment *ith daytime attempts.
I,&E,SI&Y O2 6&&E-P&S
The degree of enthusiasm that is de(oted to any pursuit is directly
related to successfully reaching a goal. 8o*e(er" it is (ery important
to !no* *hen to ease up" especially *ith the delicate matter of phase
entry. One attempt per day using a direct techni4ue is sufficient. +f
more attempts are made" the 4uality of each attempt *ill suffer
considerably.
Interesting Fact!
Many approach direct techni4ues as if digging a
ditch' the $ore - the faster and the "etter( The
result' do*ens of atte$pts that yield no fruit(

3 lot of practitioners belie(e that do?ens of attempts o(er the
course of a day *ill yield the phase. This is not the path to success
and *ill 4uic!ly lead to disillusionment *ith the practice. E(en if
after a *ee! or a month no results are seen" direct techni4ues should
be attempted only once daily. Persistent" analytical" and sensible"
stubborn resol(e to practice properly *ill produce the desired effect.
)U:6&IO, O2 6, 6&&E-P&
+t is useless to attempt entering the phase using a direct
techni4ue by lying in bed and resol(ing neither to sleep nor get up
until the phase occurs. 6uch coarseness in handling delicate nature of
the mind *ill produce nothing besides rapid emotional e&haustion.
Rigid timeframes apply *hile performing direct techni4ues before
a sleep or in the middle of the night. 9irect techni4ues attempts
should only last 1C to -C minutes. 2onger durations inhibit sleepiness
because the mind *ill concentrate too long on the techni4ues" and the
desire to fall asleep *ill dissipate" resulting in insomnia that often
lasts se(eral hours. O(erdone efforts negati(ely affect natural
enthusiasm due lost sleep and being tired the follo*ing day" *hich is
compounded by the reality of a gro*ing number of failed attempts.
+f direct techni4ues produce no effect o(er the course of 1C to -C
minutes before sleep or in the middle of the night" then it is better to
go to sleep *ith the thought that e(erything *ill *or! out another
time. This is the positi(e outloo! a practitioner ought to al*ays
maintain.
BO)Y POSI&IO,
0ith indirect techni4ues body position isnFt important since
conscious a*a!ening regardless of body position is the goal.
8o*e(er" the position of the body is crucial *hile practicing direct
techni4ues.
There is not an e&act body position that each practitioner should
assume since" once again" indi(idual characteristics and instincts
differ *idely. There are specific rules that allo* one to select the
right position" based on indirect indicators.
Many hold a belief that the correct pose is that of a corpse I lying
on the bac! *ithout a pillo*" legs and arms straightened. This notion
has probably been borro*ed from other practices claiming that it
helps achie(e an altered state of mind. 8o*e(er" this position
seriously impairs the efforts of the ma'ority of practitioners. The
corpse pose should only be used *hen it is probable that a
practitioner *ill 4uic!ly fall asleep *hile performing techni4ues in
this pose" e(en though it generally pre(ents sleep.
+f a practitioner e&periences difficulty falling asleep and is
constantly a*a!e *hile performing direct techni4ues" then the most
comfortable position for the indi(idual should be used.
-f sleep co$es 4uite easily to a practitioner, a less natural
position should "e ta+en( -f a practitioner e#periences fe&er gaps in
consciousness &hen the techni4ues are perfor$ed and has a harder
ti$e falling asleep, a $ore co$forta"le a position should "e used(
9epending on the situation" there are many possible positions/ lying
do*n on the bac!" on the stomach" on the side" or e(en in a half%
reclined position. +t is possible that a practitioner *ill ha(e to change
positions from one attempt to another" introducing ad'ustments
related to a free%floating state of mind.
:E<6E6&IO,
7y nature" one should clearly understand that direct techni4ues
are in and of themsel(es rela&ation methods" inasmuch as no phase
can occur *ithout one being rela&ed. 3ccordingly" one can go
immediately into the phase *ithout any prior rela&ation.
6ince the most effecti(e *indo* of time for using direct
techni4ues occurs before sleep and at night" and lasts only 1C to -C
minutes in any case" additional time should not be *asted on trying to
rela&" nor should time for rela&ation be subtracted from the re4uisite
1C to -C minutes.
.orrect and 4uality rela&ation is a difficult pursuit and many go
about it indi(idually" producing an opposition to natural rela&ation.
For e&ample" many endea(or to rela& their bodies to such a degree
that in the end the mind is as acti(e as it *ould be *hile trying to
sol(e a difficult mathematical e4uation. +n this type of situation"
entering the phase is impossible.
The body automatically rela&es *hen the mind is rela&ed. The
body" in turn" *ill ne(er rela& if the mind is acti(e. Therefore" it is
better for beginners refrain from the trouble of the nuances of
rela&ation and sa(e their energies for more elementary matters.
+nstead of forcing a technical rela&ation" a practitioner should
simply lie do*n for se(eral minutes and this *ill pro(ide the best
rela&ation. 2ying do*n acti(ates natural rela&ation processesJ the
most po*erful !ind.
.omplete" peaceful rela&ation may only be coerced by those *ith
speciali?ed" in%depth e&perience. 5enerally" these are people *ho
ha(e spent a great amount of time and effort mastering trance and
meditati(e states. Rela&ation in these cases should ta!e no more than
1 to : minutes and no longer as because *hen a practitioner is e&pert
at rela&ation it is sufficient to 'ust thin! about it" and it occurs.
3ll 4uality rela&ation techni4ues may *ell ser(e as direct
techni4ues" if a free%floating state of mind occurs *hile they are
e&ercised. 3fter gaining the necessary e&perience *ith trance and
meditation" a practitioner of these mental arts may proceed to
mastering the phase.
@6:I6&IO,S O2 USI,#
)I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
Techni4ues used to gain direct entrance to the phase are e&actly
the same as those used during indirect attempts. The only difference
is in the method of implementation. The techni4ues are described in
detail in .hapter -. 8o*e(er" since direct techni4ues mostly re4uire
passi(ity" not all techni4ues *or! e4ually *ell for both direct and
indirect entries into the phase. For e&ample" acti(e techni4ues li!e
straining the brain cannot be used to gain a smooth entrance into the
phase.
9irect techni4ues differ from indirect techni4ues in their
implementation because of the slo*" halting production of results that
occurs from the beginning of a direct attempt through the end of it. +f
upon a*a!ening something happens to *or!" then this can practically
al*ays lead to entrance into the phase. For e&ample" the same
phantom *iggling before sleep can begin 4uic!ly enough" but range
of mo(ement *ill not be easy to increase" and the entire
implementation of the techni4ue *ill rely on protracted" rhythmic
mo(ement. Results ta!e much longer/ ten minutes instead of ten
seconds. These differences also apply to e(ery techni4ue described in
this guideboo!.
2i!e the practice of indirect techni4ues" to begin the practice of
direct techni4ues" a practitioner should choose : or < of the most
suitable techni4ues from those that pro(e most effecti(e to the
indi(idual. +n order to assist the practitioner" a table has been
pro(ided" detailing the documented effecti(eness of the direct
techni4ues/
The primary difference in *or!ing *ith direct techni4ues is the
time that it ta!es to e&ercise each. +f testing a specific indirect
techni4ue ta!es only : to = seconds" then in this case se(eral minutes
*ill be spent. 9uration (aries depending on certain factors.
There are three primary *ays of performing the techni4ues/
classical" se4uencing" and cycling % similar to the cycling used *ith
indirect techni4ues. To understand *hich (ariant should be used"
consider the follo*ing table/
@ariations of Using the
&echni'ues
When to Use It
:lassical Bpassive) variation'
One attempt of 1 techni4ue.
The techni4ue may be alternated
after each attempt.
% *hen learning direct
techni4uesJ
% *hen a practitioner generally
sleeps poorlyJ
% if attempts lead to *a!ing upJ
% if attempts *ith other
(ariations occur *ithout lapses in
consciousnessJ
% if the body and consciousness
are in a rela&ed stateJ
Se4uencing B$iddle)' % used if falling asleep occurs
&he -ost Effecti?e )irect &echni'ues at Seminars of the School
of Out-of-Body &ra?el
Phantom 0iggling 1=K
Rotation 1=K
2istening in 1=K
;ibrations (occurring amid the use of other
techni4ues)
1=K
Obser(ing +mages 1CK
Mi&ture of Techni4ues 1CK
6imple separation (usually mi&ed in *ith other
techni4ues)
1CK
Other Techni4ues 1CK
One attempt *ith - to :
techni4ues for 1 to = minutes.
Techni4ues are alternated
infre4uently. 3ggression
fluctuates *ith the length of time
that the techni4ues are
performed.
*hile using the classical
(ariation" or if cycling results in
becoming *ide a*a!eJ
% *hen a practitioner generally
falls asleep 4uic!lyJ
:ycling Bactive)'
3lgorithm of cycling :
techni4ues li!e *ith indirect
entry to the phase" but
performing each techni4ue for 1C
seconds to 1 minute" and not : to
= seconds.
% if the classical and se4uencing
(ariations put one asleepJ
% *hen one generally falls
asleep (ery 4uic!lyJ
% can also be employed *hen
e&hausted or sleep depri(edJ

3 practitioner should al*ays begin *ith the classical (ariation" i.e.
using one techni4ue o(er an entire attempt. 9ue to the unusual nature
of the efforts in(ol(ed" a beginnerFs enthusiasm may sustain a
completely alert state. 2ater" ho*e(er" strong" prolonged lapses of
consciousness into sleep may occur. 8ere" it may be necessary to
increase the le(el of acti(ity by transitioning to the se4uencing
(ariation.
6e4uencing is the primary (ariation used for direct techni4ues
because of its elasticity in application. +t can be passi(e if o(er the
course of 1= minutes *hen a practitioner alternates t*o techni4ues
for fi(e minutes. +t may also be aggressi(e if used se4uencing three
techni4ues for one minute. E(erything bet*een these t*o e&tremes
allo*s proper practice of the techni4ues and selection of the best
(ariation to achie(e a free%floating state of mind.
+f falling off to sleep stubbornly occurs e(en *ith the acti(e form
of se4uencing" then one should start cycling through indirect
techni4ues" but performing each techni4ue from 1C seconds to 1
minute.
3s long *or! *ith the techni4ues is implied" one should not torment
oneself if one does not *ant to do something" other*ise one may
4uic!ly tire out. E(erything should be a pleasure to do and not cause
any e&cessi(e emotional tension.
&9E 2:EE-2<O6&I,# S&6&E O2 -I,)
There are almost infinite descriptions of direct entry techni4ues
offered in literature" stories" on the +nternet" and at seminars.
6ometimes" one description fundamentally differs from another. +n
the ma'ority of cases" ho*e(er" common threads e&ist that unite
almost e(ery description of a particular techni4ue/ short lapses in
consciousness" memory gaps" and drifting in and out of sleep" all of
*hich are hallmar!s of the free%floating state of mind. 3fter any of
these phenomena occur" all manner of unusual pre%phase or phase
sensations arise.
2apses in consciousness may last for seconds" se(eral minutes" or
more than an hour. They may range from a simple loss of
consciousness to entrance into a full%fledged dream. They may be
singular and rare" or may occur se(eral times o(er the course of a
minute. 0hate(er a lapse entails" the mind attains a mode of
operating that is ideal for phase e&perimentation" pro(ided the
practitioner is able to refrain from deep sleep and 4uic!ly return to a
conscious" *a!ing state.
)ot e(ery lapse of consciousness leads to the phase. The lapse
must ha(e sufficient depth to be effecti(e. Thus" *ith e(ery
unsuccessful lapse" another deeper lapse should be incurred.
The primary practical dra*bac! of the free%floating state of mind
is the possibility of falling completely asleep during lapses instead of
only temporarily dipping into sleep. Techni4ues are definitely
necessary to ensure the desired result. 6uch techni4ues more or less
fulfill an au&iliary function" and thus one need not be strict about
them.
Interesting 2actF
-t does not $atter &hich direct techni4ue is used@
as long as it leads to lapses in consciousness,
success is possi"le(

0hen performing the (ariations of the techni4ues" a practitioner
can begin to (acillate bet*een full alertness and complete asleep"
coming to" and then nodding off again.
To a(oid falling asleep re4uires a strong desire to return to
*a!efulness. This is accomplished by a strong resol(e on the part of
the practitioner" e(en if" *hile performing a direct techni4ue" drifting
in and out of sleep occurs. The practitioner must firmly assert that at
the moment consciousness tapers off" a*a!ening *ill immediately
occur.
On the other hand" if lapses do not occur" and are replaced by
complete alertness" the follo*ing tric!s of the trade may help/ full
concentration on mental actions or" con(ersely" musing and
daydreaming in parallel *ith the techni4ue being used. +t should be
noted that these are only effecti(e at the initial stages of *or!ing *ith
direct techni4ues since such techni4ues ha(e a strong sleep%inducing
effect.
+f direct techni4ues do not lead to light sleep or singular lapses
after a long period of regular practice" then it must be assumed that
the practitioner is dealing *ith some appreciable error in techni4ue or
in the length of performance.
Regulating the number of lapses that occur may be modified by
body position during practice or by changing the (ariation used *hile
performing techni4ues.
Entering the phase *ith a free%floating state of mind most often
occurs as the result of three !ey factors. First" one techni4ue or
another may begin to *or! *ell during a lapse. 6econd" nearness to
the phase may une&pectedly manifest itself through sounds or
(ibration after a lapse. 9uring this" transitioning to techni4ues that
correspond to the abo(e symptoms (listening in" straining the brain)
may be applied. Third" *hen e&iting a lapse" it is sometimes easy to
separate or 4uic!ly find a *or!ing techni4ue by paying attention to
initial indicators.
2apses in consciousness are not bound to occur in 1CCK of cases.
8o*e(er" stri(ing to achie(e lapses plays a (ery important role since
they are not al*ays percei(able" and a lapse occurrence is not al*ays
ob(ious. They can be (ery short in duration or shallo*. Or" they may
not occur at all. )onetheless" properly applied techni4ues to produce
lapses may gi(e entrance to the phase.
6UEI<I6:Y 26C&O:S
sing direct techni4ues in the e(ening or in the middle of the
night ta!e ad(antage of the bodyFs natural state of fatigue and for
practical purposes this natural tiredness may be amplified. For
e&ample" direct techni4ues more easily lead to success if the
practitioner is considerably sleep%depri(ed. Moreo(er" in such a state"
inducing a free%floating state of mind may be forgone. The most
important thing is simply not to fall asleep immediately" in addition to
employing the appropriate (ariations *ith the techni4ues. 0illful
depri(ation of sleep is torturous and useless e(en though great results
may be achie(ed by an e&perienced and !no*ledgeable practitioner
in a se(erely fatigued state. 7eginners are better off approaching all
forms of practice in a natural" balanced *ay.
3n intense longing sleep is not limited to long periods of sleep
depri(ationJ physical and emotional fatigues also play important
roles. +n that case" the most important thing is not to fall asleep *hen
performing the techni4ues" and thus one must select a more acti(e
techni4ue (ariation than usual.
S&:6&E#Y 2O: 6C&IO,
9irect techni4ues seldom produce 4uic! and clear results" unli!e
entering the phase (ia becoming conscious *hile dreaming or
through the use of indirect techni4ues. 3t first" direct techni4ues
produce sporadic results" *hich is *hy the path of practice should not
begin *ith direct techni4ues hoping for fast results. +t is better to
systematically practice a techni4ue" *or!ing to*ard mastery on a
consistent basis.
There is no cause for *orry if results are achie(ed after a month
of daily attempts. 3 continual effort to analy?e practice and impro(e
should be the primary focus because failures are al*ays caused by
distinguishable mista!es.
3lthough difficulties may arise *ith direct techni4ues" one should
ne(er abandon *hat *or!ed until then (i.e. indirect techni4ues)" as
this could temporarily depri(e one of the e&perience that one has
gained so far.
3 combination of direct and indirect techni4ues should ne(er be
used during the course of a single day since this *ould be detrimental
to practical focus and enthusiasm. +t is better to separately perform
each type of techni4ue on different days. For e&ample" direct
techni4ues could be used before falling asleep during the *or!*ee!
*hile indirect techni4ues may be practiced during the *ee!ends
*hen a practitioner has more chances to e&periment using the e&tra
opportunities to sleep.
&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES
WI&9 )I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
3ssuming an incorrect position *hen lying do*n.
Performing direct techni4ues during the day *hen a practitioner
is ine&perienced" instead of in the e(ening or at nightJ
Performing more than one attempt per day.
Performing protracted rela&ation before the techni4ues" e(en
*hen this may play a negati(e role.
Performing the techni4ues for too long *hen they should be
e&ercised for no more than -C minutes.
Forgetting to affirm a strong intention of a*a!ening during a
lapse of consciousness.
2ac! of a free%floating state of mind. This is mandatory
Falling asleep during lapses in a free%floating state of mind"
instead of *or!ing to*ard multiple lapses *hile a*a!ening.
Forgetting separation techni4ues and a*aiting some un!no*n
e(ent upon emergence from a lapse" instead of ta!ing ad(antage of
the moment.
E&cessi(ely alternating the techni4ues in a primary repertoire"
instead of testing them in a planned and systematic manner.
8olding the breath *hen unusual sensations are encountered.
3l*ays be calm.
8alting practice *hen unusual sensations occur *hen it is
necessary to continue *hat brought about the sensations.
E&cessi(e e&citement *hile performing direct techni4ues.
2ac! of aggression during attempts due to fatigue and sleep
depri(ation.
2ac! of a clear plan of action. nderstanding and planning the
use of distinct (ariations of the techni4ues beforehand is crucial to
the analysis of subse4uent errors in practice.
Exercises for Chater (
=uestions
1. 0hich techni4ues should be mastered before proceeding to
direct techni4ues1
-. 6hould results from the use of direct techni4ues be e&pected
after se(eral days or a *ee!1
:. +s it better to practice direct techni4ues during the day or in
the e(ening1
<. +s it correct to perform three direct attempts per day1
=. 0hich body position should be assumed *hen suffering from
insomnia1
>. 0hich body position should be used by a person *ho falls
asleep 4uic!ly1
@. 8o* much time should be spent on a single direct attempt1
A. 0hen can direct attempts be made for a longer period of time
than usual1
B. 0hat is the best *ay for an ine&perienced practitioner to
rela&1
1C. .an direct techni4ues substitute rela&ation techni4ues1
11. .an rela&ation techni4ues substitute direct techni4ues1
1-. 8o* many (ariations for performing direct techni4ues are
there1
1:. +n *hat case is the (ariation of se4uencing *ith direct
techni4ues employed1
1<. 0hich techni4ue may not be used for direct entrance to the
phase *ith the goal of creating a free%floating state of mind1
1=. 0hat happens to consciousness *hile in a free%floating state
during direct techni4ues1
1>. 6hould a*a!ening be attempted if falling asleep occurred
*hile using direct techni4ues1
1@. 0hat is the probability of entering the phase *ithout a free%
floating state of consciousness1
1A. 0hat do unsuccessful attempts using direct techni4ues most
often end in1
1B. +s se&ual acti(ity before an e(ening attempt using direct
techni4ue beneficial1
&as$s
1. .hoose the best body position for direct techni4ues based on
your indi(idual preferences.
-. se the classical (ariation of performing direct techni4ues
until it phase entrance" or falling asleep se(eral times.
:. sing a combination of (ariations for direct techni4ues"
achie(e a free%floating state of mind.
<. 0hen performing direct techni4ues" try to achie(e no less
than three lapses in consciousness before -C minutes elapse" or
before you fall asleep. Repeat this challenge until phase entrance
is achie(ed.
Chater * " Becoming Conscious While )reaming
&9E CO,CEP& O2 &EC9,I=UES I,@O<@I,#
BECO-I,# CO,SCIOUS W9I<E ):E6-I,#
The techni4ues for phase entrance (ia becoming conscious *hile
dreaming are based on reaching consciousness and self%a*areness
during a dream" *hich" regardless of dream 4uality" can be
transitioned into a fully reali?ed phase e&perience. .ontrary to
popular opinion" ha(ing an out%of%body e&perience through dreaming
differs little from other techni4uesJ the primary results of *hich may
be persistently categori?ed as dissociati(e e&periences/ being fully
conscious *hile remo(ed from the perception of a physical body.
The realism of a phase induced through becoming conscious in a
dream does not differ from phases entered using other techni4ues"
and" *hen deepened" the phase offers more (i(id and lucid
e&periences than those of e(eryday life.
+f a practitioner becomes a*are of a dream *hile in it (usually
accompanied by a clear reali?ation that it is" #'ust a dream$)" then the
phase is e&perienced from that moment for*ard.
7eginners often confuse the notion of becoming conscious *hile
dreaming *ith induced dreaming. 3n induced dream is the dream of
a specific topic" pro(o!ed on demandJ this does not presuppose
consciousness. Moreo(er" not all practitioners clearly understand
*hat it means to be fully conscious *hile dreaming. .onsciousness
*hile dreaming is al*ays present to some e&tent" but it is necessary
to be as conscious as one *ould be in a *a!eful state. 3*areness is
not possible as long as the plot of the dream continues. 0hen full
understanding occurs that e(erything around is 'ust a dream" a person
drops the dream and starts doing only *hat he *ants to do at that
(ery moment. 3nd after a*a!ening" he should not thin! that *hat
happened *as absurd or une&plainable.
9uring the process of becoming conscious in a dream" a
practitionerFs actions must be completely subordinated to the desire
to e&perience a 4uality phase. This is *hy" upon becoming conscious
in a dream" proceeding to techni4ues related to deepening and
maintaining is crucial.
Techni4ues for becoming conscious in a dream differ (ery much
in nature from other techni4ues" and there are good reasons *hy
these methods are differentiated from other practices" li!e so%called
astral pro1ection or out-of-"ody e#perience BOB2). 8o*e(er" their
characteristics differ (ery little in terms of results.
The techni4ue%related peculiarities rest in the fact that specific
actions are not re4uired to produce immediate" concrete results. 3ll
techni4ue%related elements are performed outside of *hen
consciousness *hile dreaming occurs. This is because it is impossible
to ta!e some action if you are not conscious and do not reali?e that
you are dreaming. 3ll efforts are directed at ma!ing that (ery
reali?ation someho* occur.
Interesting Fact!
2ven if a practitioner pays no heed to the
techni4ues for "eco$ing conscious &hile drea$ing,
"ut applies direct or indirect techni4ues, on
average each fifth phase &ill still occur through
"eco$ing conscious in a drea$( This has "een
statistically proven at se$inars of the School of
Out-of-Body Travel(

Many stri(e to achie(e consciousness during each dream o(er the
course of an entire nightJ ho*e(er" this is rarely possible due to
physiological barriers. There is a good reason that sleep and dreams
are an important part of a human life. There is an important need to
s*itch off not only body" but also consciousness" so that it may
unconsciously sift and process the (ast (olume of information
obtained in e(eryday life.
The timeframe for achie(ing conscious dreaming is (ery difficult
to estimate due to the nature of re4uired actions. +ntensity and
intention definitely e&ert hea(y influence. 3 practitioner may become
conscious in a dream *hen first lapsing into sleep" regardless of
*hen it occurs. Or" *ith regular attempts" this could happen in t*o
*ee!s to a month. )e(ertheless" these techni4ues promise a much
higher li!elihood of success than direct methods" and can be
compared *ith indirect techni4ues % inferior to the latter only in terms
of the speed at *hich results are achie(ed and the amount of effort
re4uired. 0hile indirect techni4ues yield ma&imum results in light of
a full nightFs rest" the amount of time spent in bed is not a significant
factor to achie(ing dream consciousness. Therefore" this techni4ue is
sure to guarantee entry into the phase" especially if difficulty has been
encountered *hile practicing other techni4ues.
Techni4ues used to attain dream consciousness should not be
combined *ith other types of techni4ues. +t is better to focus on one
thing at a time. -nterestingly, &hen a techni4ue is practiced on a
regular "asis, there is nearly a 17 guarantee that drea$
consciousness &ill spontaneously occur( % practitioner $ust +no&
ho& to react &hen this happens(
&EC9,I=UES 2O: BECO-I,#
CO,SCIOUS I, 6 ):E6-
+t is possible to simultaneously practice se(eral techni4ues for
becoming conscious in a dream since e(ery techni4ue is directly
compatible and complementary to another.
:emem3ering )reams
There is a *ell !no*n and *idespread of fallacy that supposes
that dreams do not occur for some people. E(eryone dreams" but not
e(eryone remembers their dreams. E(en those *ho acti(ely dream
remember only a small fraction of these nightly e&cursions. 8ence"
one should not thin! that it is impossible for someone *ho does not
remember dreams to become conscious in one. 6uch a person should
simply try to use the techni4ues.
3t the same time" there is a direct correlation bet*een the number
of dreams remembered and the probability of becoming conscious
*hile dreaming. That is *hy de(eloping the ability to remember
dreams is crucial. +n essence" the ability to achie(e dream
consciousness rests *ith the conscious mind" *hich is (ery much
interconnected *ith memory%related processes.
.onsciousness is naturally inherent in dreams" but it lac!s rapid"
operati(e memory. 9reamers may !no* *ho they are" their names"
ho* to *al!" and ho* to tal!" but may not !no* ho* surrounding
e(ents are related" or the nature of their significance.
7y increasing the fre4uency of remembered dreams" short%term
dream memory becomes more de(eloped" *hich enables more
realistic dream e&periences follo*ed by a higher probability of dream
consciousness.
There are three techni4ues dedicated to increasing the number of
remembered dreams.
The first is to simply recall the details of dreams upon a*a!ening.
0ithin the first fe* minutes of *a!ing up" try to remember as many
dreams from the night before as possible. This should be done *ith a
great amount of attention and diligence because this e&ercise
strengthens the memory. +f possible" during the day" or" better yet"
before going to sleep at night" recalling the pre(ious nightFs dreams
once again is highly beneficial.
0riting dreams do*n in a special dream 'ournal is much more
effecti(e than simple recall. Record dreams in the morning *hile
memories are still fresh. The more details recalled *hen recording
the dream" the better the ultimate results. This is a (ery attenti(e
approach that demands a higher a*areness than simple recollection.
0riting dreams in a 'ournal significantly increases a*areness of
actions and aspirations.
3nother *ay of remembering dreams is to create a map of the
dream *orld. This is called drea$ cartography and is similar to
!eeping a 'ournal" though an enhanced le(el of a*areness is
de(eloped by connecting dream episodes on a map.
First" record one dream" describing locations and e(ents" *hich are
plotted on the map. This cartographic process is repeated *ith each
subse4uent dream" and after se(eral dreams an episode *ill occur that
is someho* related to the location of a dream that has already been
recorded. The t*o dreams that too! place near each other are plotted
ne&t to each other on the map. O(er time" more and more interrelated
dreams *ill occur and the map *ill become increasingly concentrated
rather than disconnected. 3s a result" the fre4uency and realistic
4uality of remembered dreams *ill increase" and the dreamer *ill
increase the ability to achie(e consciousness *hile dreaming.
+t is best to set remembered dreams to memory after temporary
a*a!enings (ersus *aiting until morning. To accomplish this" it helps
to ha(e a pen and a piece of paper nearby so that a practitioner may
4uic!ly 'ot do*n a phase or se(eral !ey *ords from the plot of the
dream before falling bac! asleep. sing this information" the ma'ority
of dreams are 4uic!ly and completely recalled.
The initial result from e&ercising these techni4ues is a rapid
increase in the number of remembered dreams. 0hen this number
becomes significant (any*here bet*een fi(e and 1C per night)" dream
consciousness follo*s on a regular basis.
Intention
+ntention is crucial to the success of any techni4ue. 0ith regard to
dream consciousness" its significance is multiplied. The creation of
intention is ine&tricably lin!ed to the creation of internal aspiration"
*hich has re(erberations in both conscious and unconscious states. +n
reality" an ele(ated degree of intention operates as a po*erful method
of mental programming.
This techni4ue is performed before falling asleep by affirming a
strong desire to become conscious *hile dreaming. For best results"
alongside a strong" clearly defined intention" thin! through *hat
actions *ill be ta!en *hen dream consciousness is achie(ed.
Creating an 6nchor
6ince dream consciousness is not lin!ed to specific actions that
ta!e place *ithin a dream and sensory perception continues to
operate in the dream state" it is possible to de(elop and use an
artificially conditioned refle& to achie(e consciousness. The essence
of this techni4ue is to train the consciousness to uniformly react to
certain stimuli that occur *hile being a*a!e and *hen dreaming"
establishing a habit of specific response e(ery time a certain situation
occurs.
For e&ample" *hile a*a!e" a practitioner may as!" #3m +
dreaming1$ e(ery time they see an anchor. 3n anchor is any ob'ect
that is often encountered *hile a*a!e and *hile dreaming. E&amples
of anchors include a practitionerFs o*n hands" red ob'ects" or running
*ater. 0hen first using this techni4ue" a practitioner *ill be unable to
4uestion *hether a dream is in progress e(ery time a pre%established
anchor is encountered. 8o*e(er" *ith training and a strong desire
this techni4ue 4uic!ly produces results. O(er time" subconscious
4uestioning of the practitionerFs state becomes habit" happening
*hile a*a!e and dreaming. The end result is dream consciousness.
+t is important to note that one needs not only to simply as! this
4uestion" but that it is also important to ans*er it mindfully" trying to
isolate oneself from surrounding e(ents in order to be able to ans*er
it in an as ob'ecti(e and unpredetermined *ay as possible. Failing to
ans*er ob'ecti(ely *ill al*ays result in a negati(e response (no)" and
dream consciousness *ill not be achie(ed.
,atural 6nchors
+n addition to creating deliberate anchors that induce conscious
dreaming" natural anchors should be gi(en focused attention. These
are ob'ects and actions that regularly cause dream consciousness"
e(en *hen consciousness is not desired. 7eing a*are of the e&istence
of natural anchors actually doubles the chances of their appearance.
The follo*ing e&periences are common natural anchors that are
present in dreams/ death" sharp pain" intense fear" stress" flying"
electric shoc!" se&ual sensations" and dreaming about phase entrance
or the phase en(ironment. 0hen attempting dream consciousness"
identifying natural anchors produces results nearly 1CCK of the time.
One may try to start flying each time that one ans*ers the
4uestion. This is of course pointless *hen in *a!ing reality.
8o*e(er" *hen dreaming" this *ill most li!ely lead to flight and once
again pro(e that e(erything around is 'ust a dream.
Self-6nalysis
.onsistent analysis of dreams helps to ascertain reasons for an
absence of conscious a*areness/ these analyses are significant to
attaining dream consciousness. O(er the course of a lifetime" the
mind gro*s accustomed to the parado&ical nature of dreams and pays
less attention to them. This becomes apparent *hile trying to
understand that a red crocodile is unable to tal!" cannot be red" nor
can it rent an apartment. 0hile dreaming" these impossibilities are
ne(er called into 4uestion. The essence of self%analysis is
remembering dreams and thin!ing hard about *hy their parado&ical
features had not been ade4uately recogni?ed in the dream state.
0ith e&perience" the e(eryday analysis of the correspondence of
dreams to reality begins to ha(e an effect on a practitionerFs
reasoning *ithin the dream state. For e&ample" that red crocodileFs
presence in a rented apartment could cause doubts that gi(e pause for
reflection" *hich could in turn lead to the understanding that
e(erything happening is 'ust a dream.
6C&IO,S &O BE )O,E W9E, BECO-I,#
CO,SCIOUS W9I<E ):E6-I,#
To ensure that dream consciousness leads to a fully de(eloped
phase e&perience" one of three specific actions must be ta!en.
The best is the techni4ue is deepening" *hich should be
immediately applied once dream consciousness occurs. 9eepening
must be performed *ithin the dream episode before all other
techni4ues. 9oing so (irtually guarantees entrance to the phase. The
choice of actions that follo* deepening is dependent upon a
practitionerFs predetermined course of plan in the phase.
0hen becoming conscious *hile dreaming" it is 4uite dangerous
to try to return to oneFs body in order to roll out of it right a*ay
unless one has deepened beforehand. This could result in a situation
*here" after ha(ing easily returned to oneFs body" one *ould not be
able to separate from it" as the phase becomes significantly *ea!er
*hen physical sensations coincide *ith the position of a real body. +f
one is to employ such an option" then in order to return to oneFs body
one should simply thin! about it" *hich is often sufficient to ma!e
the transition occur almost immediately.
3nother option is the use of translocation techni4ues to arri(e at a
desired place *ithin the phase *orld. +t is also dangerous to employ
this (ariation *ithout first deepeningJ translocating in a shallo*
phase ma!es a return to the *a!eful state (ery li!ely. Translocation is
often accompanied by a substantial decrease in the depth of the phase
state.
S&:6&E#Y 2O: 6C&IO,
To achie(e dream consciousness" constant practice is highly
necessary because sporadic practice *ill fail to de(elop the re4uisite
bac!ground thought processes.
3s a rule" employing phase entry techni4ues *ithin the conte&t of
dream consciousness produces results after se(eral *ee!s" and the
effects of the techni4ues are increasingly pronounced *ith time. +f
there are no results *ithin a month or t*o" refrain from these
techni4ues for a period of time" ta!e a brea! for a *ee! or t*o" and
resol(e to assume a fresh start later.
Practitioners often stop using these techni4ues after initial results
as later effects become elusi(e and the fre4uency of dream
consciousness rapidly declines. These techni4ues should not be
abandoned after first yielding results" though a gradual decrease in
practice is generally acceptable.
&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES W9E, P:6C&ICI,#
BECO-I,# CO,SCIOUS W9I<E ):E6-I,#
Percei(ing the state of dream consciousness as a non%phase state
e(en though this phenomenon is one and the same *ith the phase.
3ttempting dream consciousness *hile performing other phase
entrance techni4ues *hen it is better to focus on dream consciousness
alone.
0hen falling asleep" lac!ing sufficient desire to e&perience
conscious dreaming e(en though this is critical.
.ontinuing to yield to the plot of a dream e(en after achie(ing
dream consciousness" *hereas subse4uent actions must be
independent and based on free *ill.
+ncorrectly ans*ering the 4uestion #3m + dreaming1$ *hile
dreaming.
Forgetting to immediately begin deepening techni4ues *hen
dream consciousness has been achie(ed.
0hen e&ercising memory de(elopment" recalling the most (i(id
dreams instead of e(ery dream.
+nconsistent concentration *hile practicing dream consciousness
techni4ues.

Exercises for Chater *
=uestions
1. 0hat is the difference bet*een an out%of%body e&perience and
dream consciousness1
-. 3fter attaining dream consciousness" does the realistic 4uality
of the surroundings differ from that of *a!efulness1
:. 0hich techni4ue can be used in a dream to become conscious
in it1
<. +s it possible to achie(e dream consciousness after the first
attempt1
=. +s it true that not all people dream1
>. 0hy is learning to remember as many dreams as possible
important for becoming conscious *hile dreaming1
@. 0hat is dream cartography1
A. To e&perience dream consciousness" *hat must be done *hile
falling asleep1
B. .ould a tape measure become an anchor used to achie(e
dream consciousness1
1C. 0hat e&periences in dreams often spontaneously gi(e rise to a
state of conscious a*areness1
11. 0hat must immediately be done after becoming conscious
*hile dreaming1
&as$s
1. E(ery day" immediately before going to sleep" culti(ate a
strong desire to become conscious in future dreams.
-. 0hen you *a!e up" recall or *rite do*n the episodes and
plots of your dreams e(ery day.
:. Try to achie(e at least one instance of dream consciousness.
Chater + " ,on-autonomous -ethods
&9E ESSE,CE O2 ,O,-6U&O,O-OUS -E&9O)S
2O: E,&E:I,# &9E P96SE
/on-autono$ous $ethods of entering the phase are various types
of e#ternal influences that are a"le to help put a practitioner into the
phase state( .omputer programs" de(ices" (arious physical actions"
the aid of a helper" or e(en chemical substances are e&amples of non%
autonomous methods. +n certain cases" these methods actually help
*hile some hinder the possibility of a genuine phase e&perience.
)e(er count on a magical substance or machine to automatically
eliminate the difficulties associated *ith phase entrance. +f such a
substance e&isted" the *hole topic of phase e&perimentation *ould
e&ist at an ad(anced le(el of de(elopment and pre(alence in society.
+n actuality" there are no de(ices or methods able to consistently
pro(ide access to the phase state. 3t best" these e&ist in a largely
supplementary capacity" and the more a practitioner is able to do on
his or her o*n" the more helpful and effecti(e these supplements are.
+f phase entry has not been mastered autonomously" then results
through the use of supplements *ill be totally accidental.
The reason behind the *ea! effecti(eness of non%autonomous
methods of phase entrance rests in the fact that the physiological
process responsible for the phase e&perience cannot be e&actly
defined. Only generalities are !no*n" nothing else. +n order to gain a
clear understanding of the state" the processes that gi(e rise to it must
be discerned and analy?ed. 3ll e&isting technologies ha(e either
blundered do*n a clearly mista!en path (synchroni?ing the
hemispheres of the brain)" or tra(elled to*ard the detection and use
of indirect indicators (cueing technologies).
CUEI,# &EC9,O<O#IES
Of all non%autonomous assistance methods" cueing technologies
yield the best results. The operating principle behind cueing
technologies is 4uite simple/ a de(ice detects rapid eye mo(ement
(REM) and sends signals to a sleeping practitioner" prompting dream
consciousness or an a*a!ening that may be follo*ed by indirect
techni4ues. .ueing programs or de(ices may also send indicators
o(er specific inter(als of timeJ these are recei(ed during REM sleep
and are meant to cause a sleeping practitioner to a*a!en and attempt
indirect techni4ues.
More sophisticated REM%detecting technologies may be
purchased at speciali?ed stores or through online merchandisers.
REM%detecting technologies *or! by (irtue of special night mas!
e4uipped *ith a motion sensor that detects the fre4uency of specific
eye mo(ements that occur during REM sleep. 0hen the eye
mo(ements reach REM 4uality" the de(ice sends discreet signals to
the practitioner through light" sound" (ibrations" or a combination of
these. +n turn" the practitioner must discern the signal and react to it
*hile sleeping *ith the goal of phase entry through dream
consciousness.
The effecti(eness of REM%detecting de(ices is more plausible in
theory than in practice. The mind 4uic!ly de(elops a tolerance for
these types of e&ternal stimuli and stops reacting" and" as a result"
such technologies are hardly used more than one or t*o nights per
*ee!. 6econdly" a practitioner *ill detect only a small portion of the
signals" and conscious reaction occurs in e(en smaller instances.
.ueing technologies are best used to send signals that allo* a
practitioner to a*a!en *ithout mo(ing during REM sleep" *hich
facilitates a high probability of phase entrance through indirect
techni4ues.
Pricing of these #mind%machines$ (the common moni!er of any
de(ice that purports to produce altered consciousness) *idely (aries
and is determined by 4uality of REM detection and signaling.
3(ailable models include/ 9ream6tal!er" 9reamMa!er
()o(a9reamer)" REM%9reamer" 3stral .atapult" among many others.
6ince the use of these de(ices does not guarantee increased success in
practice" in(esting money in the technology is not recommended. +f a
practitioner is curious about cueing technologies" similar de(ices may
be constructed at home using a special computer program and a run%
of%the%mill optical mouse. 9esigns for a homegro*n setup are easily
located on the +nternet.
3nother do%it%yourself *ay of e&perimenting *ith cueing is
through the use of a computer" a music player" or e(en the alarm
cloc! function on a mobile phone. The practitioner sa(es short
sounds or phrases" played as an alarm e(ery 1= to :C minutes *hile
sleeping. These sounds *ill signal the practitioner to *a!e up and
attempt indirect techni4ues.
+f the practitioner decides to use cueing technology" se(eral
fundamental principles should be considered as results *ill be less
li!ely if they are ignored. First" mind%machines should be used no
more than t*ice a *ee!. Other*ise" too high a tolerance *ill be built
up" rendering the machines ineffecti(e. 6econd" use cueing
technology in combination *ith the deferred method" *hich *as
co(ered in the section on indirect techni4ues. +t is better to sleep for
si& hours *ithout distraction and then" after sleep has been
interrupted" put on a sleep%mas! or earpiece and continue sleeping.
6leep *ill be light for the remaining t*o to four hours as there *ill
be more REM sleep" ma!ing it easier for the mind to detect cueing
signals. Finally" master indirect techni4ues before ma!ing use of
cueing technologies to attain dream consciousness and subse4uent
phase entrance.
WO:>I,# I, P6I:S

0or!ing in pairs is considered the second most effecti(e non%
autonomous methods of entering the phase. One practitioner is to be
the acti(e one" and the other fills the role of helper. The acti(e one
practitioner attempts to enter the phase *hile the helper pro(ides
(arious types of support to this end.
For e&ample" the acti(e practitioner lies do*n in bed *hile the
helper stays nearby" *aiting for the acti(e one to fall asleep. 0hen
sleep occurs" the helper obser(es the eyes of the acti(e" *atching for
the signs of REM sleep" *hich is mainly characteri?ed by 4uic! eye
mo(ements. 0hen REM is apparent" the helper *hispers to the
sleeper" communicating that e(erything the practitioner is
e&periencing is a dream. The helper may (ary the (olume of the
*hisper" use touch to strengthen the signal" or shine a flashlight on
the sleeperFs eyelids I *hich is (ery effecti(e.
The acti(e practitioner should detect the signals *ithout *a!ing
and indicate a state of conscious a*areness by performing 4uic!"
cyclical eye mo(ements. +f no such indication is gi(en" the helper
continues to rouse the acti(e practitioner" *ho may finally *a!e.
+f the acti(e practitioner is unable to stay in the dream" indirect
techni4ues should be performed. The acti(e practitioner should under
no circumstances mo(e upon a*a!ening or *aste (aluable seconds
before transitioning to indirect attempts. +f phase entrance does not
occur after e&ercising the techni4ues" the practitioner should again
fall asleep *ith the intention of ma!ing another attempt.
5enerally" se(eral such attempts are enough to glean results.
0or!ing in pairs is best performed 'ust prior to a daytime nap" or
*ith the same deferred method used for indirect techni4ues % an
early%morning interruption of a practitionerFs nighttime sleep.
&EC9,O<O#IES 2O: I,)UCI,# &9E P96SE
The ambition to create a de(ice facilitates 4uic! and easy phase
entrance has led to the appearance of assorted technologies that claim
to fulfill such a role. 3s already stated" none of these de(ices has
been pro(en effecti(e.
The most famous of these is the 8emi%6ync system" *hich
purports to synchroni?e the t*o hemispheres of the brain. 8emi%6ync
*as de(eloped by Robert Monroe" an 3merican esotericism e&pert
researcher. The idea behind 8emi%6ync is that out%of%body sensations
may be induced by achie(ing synchroni?ation of the brainFs t*o
hemispheres. 8o*e(er" this type of approach yields a parado& for the
lac! of scientific (or pseudo%scientific) e(idence that hemispheric
synchroni?ation influences sensory perception. 3ctually" it is the
cerebral corte& and constituents that are primarily responsible for
sensory perception. 3t the beginning of the -C
th
century" it became
clear that the !ey roles in sensory processes are played by (arying
le(els of inhibition and acti(ity in the cerebral corte&" and almost not
else*here.
The !ey to sol(ing the problem of technologically induced phase
entrance rests in the inhibition processes of the cerebral corte&.
6ynchroni?ation de(ices ha(e no effect on the operation of the
cerebral corte&. The idea of using sounds of (arious fre4uencies to
induce a specific le(el of electrical acti(ity in the brain is" so far"
considered impossible. Thus" the sounds and noises used to assist
separation from the body cannot directly affect the process" but
merely ser(e as cueing signals. 6uch a system *or!s only after
ha(ing been used for a long time" if it *or!s at all. Moreo(er" it might
only *or! once or t*ice. )e(ertheless" synchroni?ation systems are
able to help practitioners reach a free floating state of consciousness
since the systems pre(ent sleep or induce *a!efulness" pro(iding
fertile ground for direct phase entry. 8o*e(er" the systems ha(e
nothing at all to do *ith synchroni?ing the t*o hemispheres of the
brain.
The idea of inducing (arious phase states through sound has
gained *ide attention. Many other programs and technologies ha(e
appeared as a result" including" for e&ample" the 7rain 0a(e
5enerator (705)" *hich allo*s the practitioner to independently
e&periment *ith a *ide array of sounds and fre4uencies and (arious
methods of transmission. The effect is the same/ cueing during sleep
or the maintenance of a transitional state. Thus" there is no noticeable
difference bet*een using machines and listening to similar sounds or
musical compositions.
+nasmuch as the de(ices described abo(e ha(e not deli(ered
notable result" the search for ne* technologies continues unhindered.
The number of ideas to e&ert nonin(asi(e influence o(er the brain
and its constituent parts is increasing. For e&ample" there is a theory
that phase e&periences may be induced by electromagnetically
stimulating the left angular gyrus. 8o*e(er" this" li!e all other non%
autonomous methods" is strictly based on theory. 3t present"
consistent" focused" unassisted practice is the simplest and only
guaranteed means to achie(ing phase entrance.
9YP,OSIS 6,) SU##ES&IO,
8ypnosis is a little%studied method of entering the phase. The idea
is that a hypnotist is able to cause a person to enter the phase through
suggestion or affirmation. There is no doubt that hypnosis is an
interesting concept" especially for persons *ho easily yield to po*er
of suggestion" but such indi(iduals account for only 1K of the
population.
9ue to specific characteristics of human perception" the chances
are nil that hypnosis is a li!ely conduit to phase entrance. 6o" it seems
unli!ely that hypnotic techni4ues *ill become *ell%!no*n" or that a
top%notch hypnotist *ould" through suggestion" easily be able to lead
a sub'ect directly into the phase.
8o*e(er" it is completely feasible that hypnotic suggestion may
promote higher fre4uency in dream consciousness or a*a!ening
*ithout mo(ing (and remembering to do indirect techni4ues). 8ere
again" this method is only a facilitator" *hile actual phase entrance
depends on the efforts of the practitioner.
P9YSIO<O#IC6< SI#,6<S
The simplest *ay to supplement the practice is establishing a
reminder that prompts conscious a*a!ening and subse4uent indirect
techni4ues. This may be accomplished by blindfolding the eyes or
tying a cord taut around an arm or leg. The idea is that the reminder is
immediately felt *hen the practitioner *a!es" prompting the attempt
of indirect techni4ues. +n actuality" mind%machines *or! using the
same principle since these are most effecti(e as cues that arouse an
intention to perform a specific action.
3 more sophisticated e&ample of a reminder is *hen a practitioner
do?es off in a position meant to cause numbness to a certain body
part. 0hile a*a!ening" the practitioner *ill ta!e the physical
numbness a cue to practice indirect techni4ues. 3 secondary benefit
to this method of physiological signaling is that the numb body part
may easily be used to perform phantom *iggling. Falling asleep
*hile lying on the bac! *ith an arm behind the head" or by lying
directly on an arm are effecti(e e&amples. These and other postures
*ill impede circulation" cause numbness" and promote a*a!ening.
)aturally" the numbness should not be e&cessi(e.
9i(erse e&periments that e&ploit physiological needs are
especially popular for inducing conscious a*a!ening or becoming
conscious *hile dreaming. For e&ample" a practitioner may forgo
*ater o(er the course of the day before attempting to enter the phase.
The effect is an acute thirst *hile dreaming" *hich may be used to
communicate that the dream state has ta!en o(er. Or" thirst causes
repeated a*a!enings" during *hich the practice of indirect techni4ues
may commence. 3n alternati(e to depri(ing the body of *ater is
including more salt in foods consumed before going to sleep.
3nother method is to drin! a lot of *ater before sleep" causing the
practitioner to a*a!en" naturally producing an opportunity to perform
indirect techni4ues. sing this has been !no*n to result in dream
consciousness.
3nother popular method helps *ith direct techni4ues. +t *or!s by
falling asleep *hile !eeping the forearm propped up at the elbo*.
0hen the practitioner falls asleep" the forearm falls to the bed as the
body shuts do*n. Feeling the arm fall signals a lapse of
consciousness" after *hich direct techni4ues may be attempted. +f this
method fails to produce results on the first try" it may be repeated by
raising the forearm before falling asleep. This method helps some"
but rarely on the first try. +t should not be counted as panacea.
2i!e all other non%autonomous methods" practicing phase entrance
using physiological signals should not be done on a regular basis.
There are more pleasant" autonomous techni4ues that only re4uire a
natural *illpo*er and healthy desire.

C9E-IC6< SUBS&6,CES
6ince the beginning" the history of ad(ances in phase entrance
methodologies has included a direct lin! to the use of consumable
supplements" starting *ith plants and mushrooms in ancient times.
The use of speciali?ed herbs" mushrooms" and cacti is still practiced
in isolated culturesJ 6iberian shamans and )orth 3merican +ndians"
for e&ample. 3mid the hunger for altered states of a*areness" these
chemical supplements ha(e reached e(ery corner of the de(eloped
*orld. 8o*e(er" the proliferation of these substances has caused a
mar!ed degradation in the progress of modern phase practice.
The names and descriptions of these (arious chemical
concoctions" herbs and plants included" are not *orthy of inclusion in
this te&t. They are officially considered illegal in some countries
*hile still a(ailable in the pharmacies of othersJ ne(ertheless" they
are all dangerous.
There are t*o primary problems *ith using such supplements.
First" practicing the phase through the consumption of chemical
substances and (arious herbal supplements is not a path to
de(elopment" but to ruin. 9rug abuse and personal de(elopment are
polar opposites" in no *ay compatible. .heap thrills are consistently
follo*ed by chemical dependencies and health problems.
6econd" although a user may e&perience phase sensations under
the influence of such substances" the 4uality of e&perience is
completely different. +t is not only the stability or depth of phase that
are affected by these supplements" but a userFs consciousness and
a*areness. The use of substances and the resultant alteration of
mental processes negati(ely impact self%a*areness. The phase must
be accompanied by t*o things/ phase sensations and a complete"
conscious a*areness. +f one of these is missing" then the state
e&perienced" by definition" is not the phase. 0hen descriptions of
these chemically #enhanced$ e&periences are studied" the hallmar! of
e(ery one is a complete lac! of control.
sing any type of chemical or herbal substance to reach the phase
must be ruled out. 6ummarily" these ma!e it impossible to e&perience
the phase and ultimately destroy physical and mental health.
&9E 2U&U:E O2 ,O,-6U&O,O-OUS -E&9O)S
2O: E,&E:I,# &9E P96SE
E(en though no beneficial non%autonomous technologies
currently e&ist" the future is *ide open before them.
0ith the de(elopment of effecti(e technologies" the phase *ill
cease as the e&clusi(e domain of the initiated and become a
*idespread practice. Only then *ill the (sometimes 'ustified)
stereotypes and pre'udices connected to the mystical nature of the
phenomenon be dispelled" and only then *ill the phase gain the
necessary attention from researchers needed to ably de(elop the
science of phase practice.
0hen e&ternally applied methods that cause phase entrance are
disco(ered" the human e&perience *ill drastically change. These
technologies for inducing and monitoring phase e&periences *ill
open up incredible possibilities. For e&ample" it *ill be possible to
participate in a mo(ie instead of 'ust *atchingJ people *ill be able to
try and e(aluate products *ithout lea(ing homeJ tra(el throughout
designed *orlds *ill ta!e placeJ computer games *ill be substituted
*ith analogous e&periences including real physical sensations.
The ultimate step *ould be the unification of phase e&periences
into a collecti(e" parallel *orld integrated to e&istent digital
net*or!s/ the Matri& (the Mindnet). sing this Matri&" it *ill be
possible to communicate *ith someone on the other side of the planet
% not 'ust through a broadband (ideo lin!" but literally tCte D tCte.
This (ision of the future is a drop in the ocean of possibilities that
*ill open *ith phase entrance technologies. The first step to*ard the
future is a thorough" pragmatic" and correct application of the
techni4ues no* a(ailable.
&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES
WI&9 ,O,-6U&O,O-OUS &EC9,I=UES
The belief that de(ices are able to phase entrance if autonomous
techni4ues fail" e(en though it is much easier to enter the phase
through strictly indi(idual efforts.
0asting a large amount of time and effort on (arious technologies
to create a phase state. )o such technology e&ists.
sing cueing technologies on a daily basis" e(en though they
arenFt supposed to be used more than t*ice a *ee!.
sing cueing technologies all night long" *hen it is much better
to use these in con'unction *ith the deferred method.
sing cueing technologies *ithout affirming a personal intention
of appropriate reaction to the signals/ this is crucial to cue
effecti(eness.
0or!ing in pairs during the first hours of nighttime sleep" e(en
though REM sleep occurs infre4uently" and then for only short
periods of time.
0hile *or!ing in pairs" the helper gi(ing an acti(e practitioner
too strong a signal. 6ignals should be !ept discreet to pre(ent *a!ing
the sleeper.
Employing an amateur hypnotist to increase the fre4uency of
dream consciousness.
The use of hypnotic suggestion to a practitioner *ho is not
susceptible to hypnosis.
sing physiological signals on a daily basis" causing physical
discomfort (ersus getting en'oyment out of the practice.
The belief chemical substances promote dissociati(e e&periences.
3cting on this belief is e4ui(alent to drug abuse.
Exercises for Chater +
=uestions
1. 3re techni4ues based on breathing be considered non%
autonomous methods of entering the phase1
-. 0hich non%autonomous and non%chemical means allo* phase
entrance after the first attempts1
:. 0hy is it still not possible to create a de(ice that causes phase
entry1
<. 3re cueing technologies beneficial to o(ercoming difficulties
*ith conscious a*a!ening1
=. 0hat happens if a practitioner uses cueing technologies for
se(en days in a ro*1
>. .an cueing technologies ma!e use of light signals1
@. .an feasting on peanuts before sleep help the process of phase
entry1
A. 0ill putting a tight rubber band around an an!le promote
phase entry1
B. 0hile *or!ing in a pair" are both practitioners re4uired to
enter the phase1
1C. .an the helper be compared to a cueing de(ice *hile *or!ing
in a pair1
11. 0hen should the helper gi(e the signal that the acti(e
practitioner is dreaming1
1-. 0ould a hypnotist ma!ing suggestions about entering the
phase be helpful to e(ery practitioner1
1:. 0hy do phase%inducing technologies sometimes *or!" e(en
though these are based on fla*ed theories1
1<. 0hat is absent in a phase induced by chemical substances1
&as$s
1. Try using a cueing de(ice se(eral times in con'unction *ith
the deferred method. .reate a short sound file and set it to a
de(ice that plays the file bet*een 1=%minute inter(als of silence.
-. 7efore going to sleep at night" try the raised forearm method
of entering the phase se(eral times. 3ttempt this using the
deferred method.
:. +f you ha(e the opportunity" try to achie(e entry into the phase
by *or!ing in pairs.
Part II
-anaging the Out-of-Body Exerience
Chater . - )eeening
&9E CO,CEP& O2 )EEPE,I,#
3eepening refers to techni4ues that induce realistic perception
and a&areness in the phase state(
The phase is not an e&act" fi&ed state *here a practitioner is
present or not. +t is a realm of states characteri?ed by a transition
from the usual perception of the physical body to a complete
alienation from it" *hile maintaining consciousness and reality of
perception" albeit in a different frame of space. The transition begins
*ith perception of the natural" physical body follo*ed by a moment
of ambiguity *here a clear e&perience of body is intermingled *ith a
sense of the percei(ed body. 3fter*ard" the percei(ed body enters the
phase space" *hile the physical body becomes a memory. 3t this
point" the percei(ed senses may be 4uite dullJ for e&ample" (ision
may be blurred or completely absent. 9eepening techni4ues sol(e the
problem of diminished or absent sensory perception in the phase.
6ensory e&periences *ithin a fully reali?ed phase e&perience are
as realistic as those in e(eryday reality. +n almost one%half of all
cases" practitioners obser(e that reality%based surroundings pale in
comparison to (ibrant detail and color of the phase space. To this end"
after entering the phase" a practitioner must perform deepening
techni4ues to enhance and solidify the degree and 4uality of phase
reality.
Full spatial perception in the phase only occurs after deepening
techni4ues ha(e been applied. There *ould be no point to remaining
in the phase *ithout deepening. For e&ample" *hat is the point in
finding a person in phase" if it is not e(en possible to discern his or
her eyes there1
-n a considera"le nu$"er of cases, deepening is not necessary,
since the phase e#perience is co$pletely realistic, if not hyper-
realistic( -n cases li+e these, deepening $ay "e "ypassed(
9eepening is also related to the length of time a practitioner may
remain in the phase. +f an action is ta!en *ithout a deep" realistic
phase" the e&perience *ill al*ays be se(eral times shorter in duration
than a phase *here deepening techni4ues had been applied. The
properties of the phase space (ery much depend on its depth. 0hen
surroundings are blurry and unclear" the stability of ob'ects is (ery
*ea!.
There is a direct correlation bet*een the realism of a phase and a
practitionerFs le(el of a*areness" so it is e&tremely important to
ensure a deep phase in order to promote ma&imum a*areness.
Interesting Fact!
The realis$ of a deep phase space is often so great
that it causes uncontrolla"le fear or shoc+(

9eepening should only be performed follo*ing complete
separation from the body. +f initiated before separation" the phase
may end prematurely. +f complete separation does not occur" primary
deepening should be used. 3s regards the deepening techni4ues
themsel(es" there is one main one and there are se(eral subsidiary
ones. The main techni4ue" *hich does not present any difficulties" is
sufficient for ha(ing a successful practice.
Interesting Fact!
-gnorance of deepening techni4ues has led to a
great nu$"er of "aseless theories and superstitions(
So$e practices treat differing phase depths as
various states and even &orlds( -n reality, there are
si$ple actions that ensure a singular phase
e#perience(
P:I-6:Y )EEPE,I,# &EC9,I=UES
The goal of primary deepening is to achie(e complete separation
from the body" allo*ing further actions *ithin the phase. Primary
deepening entails achie(ing t*o principal ob'ecti(es/ complete
separation from the physical body and anchoring the percei(ed body
*ithin the phase space.
0hen separation from the body occurs through the use of a
separation techni4ue" a posture must be assumed that completely
different from the posture of the real" physical body. The greater the
degree of postural similarity bet*een the physical and percei(ed
bodies" the more shallo* and brief the phase *ill be. For e&ample" in
the case of hori?ontal le(itation" a 1AC turn must immediately
performed" arms and legs spread" adopting a (ertical posture. nder
no circumstances should a practitioner in the phase remain in a
posture identical to that of the physical body.
+f a practitioner is pulled bac! to*ard the body after separation"
anchoring should be initiated that facilitates standing or sitting in the
phase. Resisting the gra(ity of the physical body is paramount to
remaining in the phase. The result of *illful resistance is directly
proportional to the degree of applied effort. +t *ill help to grab hold
of surrounding ob'ects and hold on to themJ any means of anchoring
the percei(ed body *ithin the phase are appropriate. +t is possible to
start rotating around an a&isJ not simply imagining the rotation" but
performing it *ith the percei(ed body as *ell.
)EEPE,I,# &9:OU#9 SE,SO:Y 6-P<I2IC6&IO,
The more a phase is e&perienced by the sensory faculties" the
deeper and longer the phase *ill be. 6ensory amplification in the
phase is the most effecti(e deepening techni4ue precisely because it
allo*s the acti(ation of primary internal sensations during the
transition from reality to the phase. There are se(eral *ays to perform
sensory amplification.

Ealpation is the first deepening techni4ue that should be recalled
*hen entering the phase.
;ision may be absent at the beginning of a phase e&perience" but
the sensation of occupying a defined space is almost al*ays present.
+n the case of a completely absent sense of sight" only tactile%
!inesthetic perception is possible. That is" mo(ement throughout a
space and the touching ob'ects there is the only option *hen (ision is
absent. The sense of touch plays a !ey role in the perception of
e(eryday reality. 3ccordingly" if the sense of touch is acti(ely used in
the phase space" it is only natural that the phase *ill deepen and reach
its ma&imum potential.
Palpation is performed by fleetingly touching anything that may
be found in the immediate surroundings. This should be done by
4uic!ly but carefully percei(ing the feel of surfaces and shapes.
8ands should not remain on a particular place for more than one
second" remaining constantly in motion to locate ne* ob'ects. The
goal of palpation is to touch and also to learn something about
encountered ob'ects or shapes. For e&ample" if one feels a mug" one
may touch it not only from the outside" but also from the inside. Once
a practitioner has rolled out of the body" the bed may be touchedJ the
physical body lying in bed may be touched" as *ell as the floor" the
carpet" nearby *alls" or a bedside table.
3nother palpation techni4ue is performed by rubbing the palms
against each other as if trying to *arm them on a cold day. 7lo*ing
on the palms also produces sensations that *ill help deepen the
phase. 6ince tactile perception of the *orld is not limited to the
palms" the hands should be mo(ed o(er the entire body *hile in the
phase to e&cite and fully acti(ate the sense of touch.
3s soon as palpation begins" the feeling that the phase is
deepening and becoming fi&ed soon follo*s. sually" it ta!es fi(e to
1C seconds of palpation e&ercises to reach the ma&imum le(el of
deepening. 3fter performing this techni4ue" the pseudo%physical
sensations *ill be indistinguishable from those of e(eryday reality. +f
(ision is absent on phase entry" it 4uic!ly emerges during palpation.
Eeering is the primary technical (ariation of sensory
amplification. 8o*e(er" it is not al*ays initially accessible since it
re4uires (ision" *hich may begin as absent in the phase. Once (ision
appears or has been created using special techni4ues (see .hapter A)"
peering may begin. The effecti(eness of this techni4ue originates in
the fact that (ision is the humanFs primary instrument of perception.
Therefore" by e&citing (ision to its ma&imum potential *ithin the
phase" it is possible to attain a fully immersi(e phase state that is
completely apart from normal reality.
Peering should be done at a distance of four to si& inches from
ob'ects *ithin the phase. 3 practitioner should glance o(er the minute
details of ob'ects and surfaces to bring definition to the phase space
*hile increasing the 4uality of (ision. 0hen loo!ing at hands" the
lines of the palm or the fingernail and cuticles should be e&amined. +f
obser(ing a *all" study the te&ture of its *allpaper. 0hen loo!ing at
a mug" one should loo! carefully at its handle" the cur(e of its rim" or
any inscriptions. 3ttention should not remain on one area of an ob'ect
for more than half a second. 3cti(e obser(ation should constantly
mo(e to ne* ob'ects and their minute details" approaching ob'ects or
pic!ing them up to dra* them nearer. +tFs best *hen ob'ects near one
anotherJ other*ise" too much time is spent mo(ing around.
Peering brings 4uic! and clear results. sually" if (ision is blurry
and there is a yearning to return into the physical body" *ith 'ust :%1C
seconds of peering all of this *ill be gone *ithout a trace. 3fter
peering" (ision ad'usts as 4uic!ly and clearly as if a camera lens *as
correctly installed in front of the eyes" capturing the image in the
sharpest of focus.
Si$ultaneous peering and palpation pro(ide the ma&imum
possible deepening effect in the phase. This method of sensory
amplification engages the t*o most important percepti(e" thus the
effect is t*ice greater than *hen the t*o actions are separately
performed. +f (ision is present in the phase" simultaneous peering and
palpation is an absolute necessity because it facilitates good phase
depth in the 4uic!est and simplest manner.
The combination of palpation and peering must not only be
performed simultaneously" but also upon the same ob'ects. For
e&ample" *hile a practitioner may loo! at the hands and
simultaneously rub them against each otherJ or *hile loo!ing at a
coffee mug" all of its parts may be obser(ed and touched at the same.
+t is necessary to maintain dynamism of action" remembering that
feelings should be e&perienced not half%heartedly" remembering that
full concentration on sensory amplification is an e&cellent means to a
deep" 4uality phase.
SECO,)6:Y )EEPE,I,# &EC9,I=UES
)i?ing 9eadfirst
9i(ing headfirst is used if sensory amplification techni4ues do
not *or!" or *hen the practitioner in the phase is located in an
undefined space *here there is nothing to touch or loo! at. This
techni4ue *or!s than!s to the unusual (estibular sensations that it
causes" *hich help to enhance perception. This techni4ue is
performed *ith the eyes shut if (ision is a(ailable and the practitioner
literally di(es headfirst into the floor or space at the feet. 3 feeling of
mo(ement a*ay from the physical body *ill immediately arise
during the flight do*n" and the di(e itself *ill be e&perienced as if it
is really happening. 6imultaneously" the surrounding space may
dar!en and become colder. 3gitation or fear may also appear. 3fter
fi(e to 1= seconds of flight" the practitioner is either arri(es in an
undetermined place in the phase or hits a dead end" li!e a *all. +n the
case of a dead end" a translocation techni4ue should be used.
Translocation may also be attempted if deepening does not occur
during the flight" if sense perception stops impro(ing" or if a good
degree of realism has already been achie(ed. 3n alternati(e to the
translocation techni4ue/ hold the hands about four to si& inches in
front of the face and try to obser(e them *ithout opening the eyesJ
this *ill mo(e the practitioner to another random location.
0hen falling headfirst" do not thin! about the floorJ assume that it
*ill be penetrated. This (ery effecti(e if the phase has not reached a
fullness of depth.
3 desire to not simply fall do*n obser(ing oneFs perceptions" but
instead race s*iftly do*n*ard *hile trying to mo(e a*ay from the
body is e&tremely important. +n case of failure to do so" instead of
deepening" such a fall may lead to a return to the state of being
a*a!e" i.e. to a foul.
@i3ration
2i!e falling headfirst" the (ibration techni4ue should be used if
sensory amplification techni4ues do not *or!" or *hen the
practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space *here there
is nothing to touch or loo! at.
3fter separating from the body" it is normally 4uite easy to create
(ibrations by thin!ing about them" by straining the brain" or by
straining the body *ithout using muscles. The occurrence of
(ibrations pro(ides a significant opportunity to deepen the phase. 3n
ad(antage of this techni4ue is that it does not re4uire any preliminary
actions and thus may be practiced at any moment.
The brain is strained to the ma&imum e&tent possible" *hich
cause (ibrations that may be intensified and managed through
spasmodic or prolonged straining.
+f this techni4ue does not produce deepening after fi(e to 1C
seconds" the techni4ue has to be changed or action should be ta!en at
the practitionerFs current depth in the phase.
6ggressi?e 6ction
This techni4ue may be used as an alternati(e to any other
deepening techni4ue since it can be used at any moment. Practicing
this techni4ue only re4uires aggressi(e action of the percei(ed body.
3 practitioner may run" roll on the floor" perform gymnastics" or
mo(e the arms and legs. Ma&imum acti(ity and aggression are
paramount to the successful use of this techni4ue.
+f the practitioner is stuc! in a dar! space" *a(ing the arms and
legs from side to side is appropriate. +f the practitioner is in *ater"
s*imming *ith determined" po*erful stro!es *ould be suitable
recourse. The type of action (ery much depends on the specific
situation along *ith an aggressi(e desire on the part of the
practitioner.
3s a rule" the effect of such mo(ements and relocations comes
4uite 4uic!ly" especially if attention is focused on all the
accompanying sensations.
Imagining reality
This interesting techni4ue should be used by e&perienced
practitioners" or if all other deepening techni4ues fail.
3 practitioner aggressi(ely imagines being located in the physical
*orld" e&periencing its intrinsic reality of perception" and not in the
phase. This should be done *hile in a state of separation from the
body *ith a sense of (ision present. +f successful" the surrounding
phase space *ill immediately brighten and sensory perception of the
phase *ill e&ceed the normal e&perience of reality.
+f this techni4ue produces no clear results after a fe* seconds"
another techni4ue should be used.
#E,E:6< 6C&I@I&Y
3ll deepening techni4ues should be practiced *ith a high le(el of
aggression" *ith no pauses" only continuous" deliberate action. +f
techni4ues are practiced in a calm" rela&ed manner" then deepening
attempts *ill most often result in falling asleep or returning to the
body.

&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES )U:I,# )EEPE,I,#
Forgetting to perform deepening techni4ues *hen necessary.
.arrying out unnecessary deepening *hile at a sufficient depth.
8alting deepening techni4ues before reaching ma&imum realism
in the phase.
.arrying out main deepening techni4ues prior to ha(ing become
completely separated from the body" although at this time only
primary deepening should be used.
.ontinuing deepening techni4ues *hen results ha(e already been
achie(ed.
3lternating too 4uic!ly bet*een deepening techni4ues instead of
concentrating on each of them for at least fi(e to 1C seconds.
Performing the techni4ues slo*ly and calmly instead of
aggressi(ely.
3pplying techni4ues of sensory amplification *hile stuc! in a
shapeless" dar! space *hen these should only be performed in a (i(id
and realistic place.
Obser(ing ob'ects located too far from the eyes during (isual
sensori?ation instead of the re4uired four to fi(e inches.
0hen peering" scrutini?ing a single detail of an ob'ect for too
long *hen it is necessary to 4uic!ly s*itch from one detail to
another.
Ta!ing in a *hole ob'ect *hen peering *hile only parts of it
should be obser(ed.
.oncentrating too long on the details of a single ob'ect instead of
focusing on different ob'ects in 4uic! succession.
2ong palpation of a single ob'ect during sensory amplification
instead of rapidly s*itching from one ob'ect to another.
9eepening *hile standing in place *hen it is important to
maintain constant motion.
Falling headfirst *ith the eyes open" although the eyes must be
shut to a(oid crashing into the floor.
Falling headfirst *ithout the desire or intention of falling far and
4uic!ly.
Forgetting to use translocation techni4ues after hitting a dead end.
Forgetting to alternate deepening techni4ues if some of them are
not *or!ing.
Fear of the hyperrealism of the e&perience and halting deepening
instead of calmly continuing *ith the techni4ue.
Exercises for Chater .
=uestions
1. 3fter *hich phase entrance techni4ues is deepening
necessary1
-. 0hy is phase deepening necessary1
:. 3re there cases *here phase deepening is unnecessary1
<. 0hat le(el of reality should be achie(ed by deepening1
=. 0hen should deepening begin after entering the phase1
>. 9oes deepening influence the length of a phase e&perience1
@. 0hy is primary deepening necessary1
A. May one touch oneFs head *hen the performing sensori?ation
of feelings1
B. 6hould a practitioner loo! at curtains *hile peering1
1C. +s it effecti(e to apply peering at phase ob'ects from a distance
of 1 to 1.= yards1
11. .an peering be used during palpation1
1-. 0hen should the eyes be closed *hile falling headfirst1
1:. 0ould thro*ing punches li!e a bo&er help a practitioner to
deepen1
1<. 8o* calmly should the deepening techni4ues be performed1
&as$s
1. 9e(ote the ne&t three successful phases to perfecting
deepening techni4ues" using all of the methods described in this
chapter.
-. sing personal e&perience" try 'udging *hich techni4ue suits
you best from personal e&perience.
Chater / - -aintaining
&9E #E,E:6< CO,CEP& O2 -6I,&6I,I,#
Ehase $aintenance or >$aintaining? refers to techni4ues that
allo& a practitioner to re$ain in the phase for the $a#i$u$ a$ount
of ti$e possi"le( 0ithout !no*ledge of #maintaining$ techni4ues" the
duration of the phase *ill be se(eral times shorter than it could
other*ise be. The shortest phases last 'ust a fe* seconds. 7eginning
practitioners usually fear not being able to e&it a phaseJ this shouldnFt
e(er be a concern because the real challenge is being able to maintain
the phase state" *hich is easily lost unless phase maintenance
techni4ues are used.
Phase maintenance consists of three primary principles/ resisting a
return to the *a!eful state (!no*n as a foul)" resisting falling asleep"
and resisting a false e&it from the phase. 3s a rule" the first t*o
problems (return to a *a!eful state" or falling asleep) are often
encountered by beginners" but the third difficulty (false e&it)
manifests at later stages of practice.
Resistance to returning to the body is self%e&planatory" *hereas
resistance to falling asleep is unclear to many. )ot e(eryone !no*s
that almost half of phase e&periences usually end in a 4uite tri(ial
*ay % falling asleep. 3 person usually looses attenti(eness" his or her
a*areness dissipates" and e(erything around gradually looses clarity
and turns into *hat is for all intents and purposes a usual dream.
Resisting a false e&it from the phase is a lot more surprising and
dramatic. 6ometimes a practitioner detects an impending e&it from
the phase" subse4uent deepening techni4ues fail to *or!" resulting in
*hat seems to be a return to the body and physical reality. 6ure that
the phase has ended" a practitioner may stand up and the fall asleep
after percei(ing a fe* steps. +n such cases" falling asleep most often
happens *ithout any mo(ement" but *hile still lying in bed. The
problem is that the difference bet*een the phase and reality can be so
subtle that in terms of internal or e&ternal indicators" the phase
practically canFt be distinguished from reality. Therefore" one must
!no* the necessary actions to ta!e in the e(ent that the phase ceases"
since the end of a phase could actually be a tric! and purely
imagined.
There are specific solutions for the three problems described in
addition to general rules that apply to any phase e&perience. 6tudying
these rules should be gi(en 'ust as high a priority as studying the
specific solutions" since only some of them" *hen applied separately"
may help one to remain in the phase se(eral times longer than usual.
+n some cases" techni4ues for maintaining are not applicable.
8o*e(er" !no*ledge of ho* to maintain is useful for the ma'ority of
e&periences. 3lso" there might be situations *hen someone need only
resist a foul" *hile someone else may need to resist falling asleep. 3ll
of this is (ery specific to each case and can be determined only in
practice.
0ith perfect !no*ledge of all the techni4ues for maintaining" a
phase may last t*o to four minutes" *hich doesnFt sound li!e an
e&tended duration" but really is. 3 particularity of the phase space is
that achie(ing something and mo(ing around in it ta!es a minimum
amount of time" mere seconds. Thus" so much can be done during :
minutes in the phase that one literally needs a list" so as not to *aste
any time.
There are theories that ha(e neither been pro(en nor dispro(en
claiming that time in the phase contracts and e&pands relati(e to real
time. Thus" one minute of real time *hile in the phase may feel much
longer in terms of phase time.
Perception of time (aries from practitioner to practitioner. )o(ices
especially percei(e a real minute as more li!e fi(e to 1C minutes in
the phase. This is determined by the particularities of indi(idual
psychology" state of mind" and the type of e(ents that occur in the
phase.
+n order to understand ho* long a phase really lasted" one does not
need to try using a stop*atch in the real *orld. +t is better to count
ho* many actions too! place in it and ho* much time each of them
could ha(e ta!en. The result *ill differ from oneFs first rough
estimate se(eral times o(er.
The ma&imum duration the phase (aries depends hea(ily on the
ability to apply phase maintenance techni4ues. 6ome practitioners
ha(e difficulty brea!ing the t*o%minute barrier *hile some find it
easy to remain in the phase for 1C minutes or longer. +t is physically
impossible to remain in the phase fore(er because e(en a -C%minute
phase is unheard of.

&EC9,I=UES 6,) :U<ES 6#6I,S&
:E&U:,I,# &O &9E BO)Y
Of the follo*ing techni4ues" constant sensory amplification and
as%needed sensory amplification are applied the most often *hile
performing phase maintenance. 8o*e(er" as opposed to other
technical elements of phase e&ploration" other secondary techni4ues
of maintaining often become mainstream and the most appropriate
for certain indi(iduals. Thus" all the techni4ues should be studied" but
the first t*o should be considered (ery carefully.
Constant Sensory 6mlification
The same sensory amplification described in the chapter on
deepening (.hapter >) also applies to #maintaining$. +n essence"
ha(ing achie(ed the necessary depth of phase" one should not stop to
acti(ely agitate his or her perception but should !eep on doing this all
the *hile" albeit not as acti(ely as during deepening.
The idea is that during the entire duration of the phase" all action
should be focused on e&periencing the ma&imum possible amount of
tactile%!inesthetic and (isual perceptions. This entails constantly
touching and e&amining e(erything in minute detail. For e&ample" if
passing by a boo!case" touch and e&amine some of the boo!s in it"
including their pages and corners. Tactile obser(ation should be
performed on e(ery encountered ob'ect.
Palpation may be applied separately as a bac!ground sensation.
This is done in order not to o(erload the sense of sight. The hands
should be touching something all the time" or better still" rubbing
each other.
6s-,eeded Sensory 6mlification
3pplying the as%needed sensory amplification techni4ue is no
different than constant sensory amplification. +t is used only *hen a
foul (a return to a *a!eful state) is imminent or *hen phase (ision
starts to blur and fade. For e&ample" *hile tra(eling in the phase
e(erything may start to blur" signaling a *ea!ening of the phase. 3t
this moment" the practitioner should touch e(ery a(ailable ob'ectJ
obser(e e(erything in fine detail. 3s soon as returns to a clear and
realistic state" actions may be continued *ithout needing to perform
amplification.
Constant @i3ration
This techni4ue is used to maintain constant" strong (ibrations in
the phase. 3s pre(iously noted" (ibrations are generated by straining
the brain or tensing the body *ithout using muscles. Maintaining
strong (ibrations *ill ha(e a positi(e effect on the length of the
phase.
Strengthening @i3rations as ,eeded
+n this case" (ibrations are created and strengthened only if signs
of a foul become apparent. E&amples of foul indicators include
duality of perception or blurred (ision. 6trengthening (ibrations *ill
help to deepen the phase" allo*ing a practitioner to stay and continue
*ithin the phase.
)i?ing 9eadfirst
This techni4ue is the same as the deepening techni4ue of the same
name. +f a phase is about to dissol(e" di(ing headfirst *ith the eyes
shut and a desire to di(e as 4uic!ly and deeply as possible. 3s soon
as phase depth returns" translocation techni4ues may be used to !eep
from arri(ing at a dead end.
2orced 2alling 6slee
3s soon as indicators of a foul appear" immediately lie do*n on
the floor and attempt forced falling asleepJ the same as the phase
entry techni4ue. 3fter successfully performing the techni4ue (:%
1Csec.) " a practitioner may get up and continue to tra(el through the
phase since the perception of reality and its depth *ill most li!ely be
restored. Resist actually fall asleep.
:otation
+f indicators of a foul appear" the practitioner should start rotating
around the head%to%feet a&is. nli!e the phase entry techni4ue of the
same name" the mo(ement does not ha(e to be imagined. This is an
absolutely real rotation in the phase. 3fter se(eral re(olutions" depth
*ill be restored and actions may be continued. +f indicators of a foul
persist" rotation should continue until proper depth is achie(ed.
Counting
9uring the entire phase" count to as large a number possible % not
'ust for the sa!e of counting" but *ith a strong desire to reach the
highest number possible. .ounting may be performed silently or out
loud.
This techni4ue *or!s by creating a strong determination to
remain in the phase by pro(iding a goal that re4uires action in the
phase.
<istening in
+f there are any bac!ground sounds similar to those heard *hile
entering the phase % rumbling" *histling" ringing" bu??ing" or si??ling
I these sounds may be used to prolong duration of the phase by
aggressi(e attempts at listening in" hearing the entire range of internal
sounds. The forced listening in techni4ue may also be used for phase
maintenance.
9oo$ing onto the hase
3nother interesting method of #maintaining$ is hoo!ing onto the
phase. +n the e(ent of an impending foul" grab onto an ob'ect in the
phase acti(ely palpate or s4uee?e it. E(en if a return to the body
occurs during this techni4ue" the hands *ill continue to hold the
phase ob'ect and the physical hands *ill not be percei(ed. 7eginning
*ith these phantom feelings in the hands" separation from the body is
possible. 3ny nearby ob'ect may be hoo!ed/ the leg of a chair" a
drin!ing glass" a door!nob" a stone" or a stic!. +f there is nothing to
grab hold of" clasp the hands together or bite do*n on a lip or the
tongue.

T*o rules apply to using the techni4ues that help to resist a phase
e&it. First of all" ne(er thin! that the phase might end and result in a
return to the bodyJ thoughts li!e this are li!e programming that
immediately send the practitioner to a *a!ened physical state.
6econdly" do not thin! about the physical body. 9oing *ill also
instantly return the practitioner to the body" e(ery time.
&EC9,I=UES 6,) :U<ES
2O: :ESIS&I,# 26<<I,# 6S<EEP
Constant Understanding of the Possi3ility of 2alling 6slee
Most of the time" falling asleep *hile in the phase can be
o(ercome by a constant a*areness that sleep is possible and
detrimental to a continued phase. 3 practitioner must al*ays consider
the probability of falling asleep and actions must be carefully
analy?ed to ensure that they are based on real desires and not on
parado&ical notions" *hich are common to dreams.
Periodic 6nalysis of 68areness
Periodically as!ing the 4uestion" #3m + dreaming1$ *hile in the
phase helps appraise situations and the 4uality of the actions being
performed at any moment. +f e(erything meets the standards of full
phase a*areness" actions may be continued. 3s!ed on a regular basis"
this 4uestion becomes habit" automatically used *hile transitioning to
the phase state. +f you !eep as!ing this 4uestion regularly" sooner or
later it *ill arise automatically at the moment *hen you are actually
transitioning into a dream. This *ill then help one to *a!e up" after
*hich it is possible to continue to remain in a full%fledged phase..
The fre4uency of the 4uestion should be based on a practitionerFs
ability to consistently remain in the phase. +f a phase usually lasts
fi(e to 1C minutes or more" it is not necessary to as! the 4uestion
more than once e(ery - minutesJ other*ise" this 4uestion has to be
as!ed fre4uently" literally once a minute" or 'ust a little less often.
There is another important rule related to resisting falling asleep/
no practitioner should engage or participate in spontaneous e(ents
occurring in the phase. E(ents that are not planned or deliberate lead
to a high probability of being immersed in the side action" *hich
results in a loss of concentrated a*areness.
&EC9,I=UES 6#6I,S&
6, U,:ECO#,ICE) P96SE
6ince the techni4ues of testing the realness of the end of the phase
are a little absurd and demand additional attention to actions" they
should only be used in those cases *hen they are indeed re4uired.
ntil then" one should simply bear them in mind and use them only
in moments of doubt. The same methods may be used to safely
determine *hether or not the practitioner is in the phase *hen using
techni4ues for entering it.
9yer-concentration
6ince the cessation of the phase e&perience may be simulated and
no different in terms of perception from a real e&it" differences
bet*een the physical *orld and the phase *orld must be acti(ely
discerned. +n other *ords" a practitioner must !no* ho* to determine
*hether a genuine phase e&it has occurred.
3t present" only one e&periment is !no*n to guarantee an
accurate result. The phase space cannot *ithstand prolonged close
(isual attention to the minute details of ob'ects. 0ithin se(eral
seconds of acute e&amination" shapes begin to distort" ob'ects change
color" produce smo!e" melt" or morph in other *ays.
3fter e&iting the phase" loo! at a small ob'ect from a distance of
four to si& inches" and remain focused on it for 1C seconds. +f the
ob'ect does not change" a practitioner can be assured that the
surroundings are reality. +f an ob'ect is someho* distorted or as!e*" a
practitioner !no*s that the phase is intact. The simplest option is to
loo! at the tip of the finger since it is al*ays close at hand. +t is also
possible to ta!e a boo! and e&amine its te&t. Te&t in the phase *ill
either blur or appear as alphabetical gibberish" or full of
incomprehensible symbols.
6uxiliary techni'ues
There are a (ariety of other procedures to test the occurrence of a
foul. 8o*e(er" since any situation" any property" or any function can
be simulated in the phase" these procedures are not al*ays applicable.
For e&ample" some suggest that it is sufficient to attempt doing
something that is realistically impossible" and" if a practitioner is in
the phase" the impossible action *ill be possible. The problem *ith
this suggestion is that the la*s of the physical *orld may be
simulated in the phase" so flying" passing through *alls or tele!inesis
may not be possible" e(en in the deepest phase. +t has also been
suggested that loo!ing at a cloc! t*ice in a ro* may help a
practitioner determine *hether or not the phase is intactJ allegedly"
the cloc! *ill display a different time each time it is obser(ed. 8ere
again" the cloc!Fs display may not change in the phase.
Of all the au&iliary procedures" one deser(es mention and *or!s
in the ma'ority of cases/ searching for differences from reality in the
surroundings. 3lthough the usual surroundings of a practitioner may
be 1CCK accurately simulated in the phase" it is (ery rare. Therefore"
it is possible to figure out *hether a phase is intact by carefully
e&amining the room *here e(erything is ta!ing place. +n the phase"
there *ill be something e&tra or something *ill be missingJ the time
of day or e(en the season *ill be different from reality" and so on. For
e&ample" *hen (erifying *hether a foul occurred" a room may be
missing the table supporting a tele(ision set" or the table may be
there" but be a different color.
#E,E:6< :U<ES 2O: -6I,&6I,I,#
The rules for maintaining the phase deal *ith resisting all or most
of the problems *hich cause a phase to end. 6ome of these rules are
capable of increasing the length of stay in the phase by many times
and must be follo*ed.
The practitioner should not loo+ into the distance( +f fara*ay
ob'ects are obser(ed for a long period of time" a foul may occur" or
one may be translocated to*ards these ob'ects. +n order to loo! at
distant ob'ects *ithout problems" a practitioner has to employ
techni4ues for maintaining. For e&ample" from time to time the
practitioner should loo! at his hands" rub them against each other" or
maintain strong (ibrations.
:onstant activity( nder no circumstances should a practitioner
remain passi(e and calm in the phase. The more actions performed"
the longer the phase is. The fe*er actions I the shorter the phase. +t is
enough to pause for thought" and e(erything stops.
Elan of action( There should be a clear plan of action consisting
of at least = tas!s to be carried out in the phase at the earliest
opportunity. This is necessary for se(eral important reasons. First" the
practitioner must not pause in the phase to thin! about #*hat to do
ne&t$" *hich fre4uently results in a foul. 6econd" ha(ing a plan" the
practitioner *ill subconsciously perform all of the actions necessary
for staying in and maintaining the phase to carry out all the tas!s that
ha(e been planned. Third" intelligent and pre%planned actions permit
focused ad(ancement of purposeful actions (ersus *asting phase
e&periences on *hate(er comes to mind at a gi(en moment. Fourth" a
plan of action creates necessary moti(ation and" conse4uently"
pronounced intent to perform the techni4ues to enter the phase.
Stopping the -3( The less +nternal 9ialogue (+9) and reflection
that occurs in the phase" the longer it lasts. 3ll thin!ing must be
concentrated on *hat is being achie(ed and percei(ed. Tal!ing to
oneself is completely prohibited. The reason for this is that many
thoughts may act as programming in the phase and e(en announcing
them internally may introduce alterations" including negati(e ones.
For e&ample" thin!ing about the body cause a return to it. The
practitioner may also get lost in thought" *hich *ill lead to a foul.
3lso" sporadic thoughts usually and 4uite easily cause the practitioner
to simply fall asleep.
% practitioner $ust try to re-enter the phase after e#periencing a
foul( 3l*ays remember that a typical phase e&perience consists of
se(eral repeated entries and e&its. Essentially" in most cases it is
possible to re%enter the phase through the use of separation or phase
state creation techni4ues immediately after returning to the body. +f
the practitioner has 'ust left the phase" the brain is still close to it and
appropriate techni4ues may be applied in order to continue the
'ourney.
&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES WI&9 -6I,&6I,I,#
Forgetting to try to re%enter the phase after it is o(er" although
doing so greatly helps to increase number of e&periences had.
6taying focused on techni4ues for #maintaining$ instead of
performing them as bac!ground tas!s.
5etting distracted by e(ents and dropping phase maintenance
techni4ues instead of continually performing *hatFs needed to
maintain the phase.
6uccumbing to the idea that maintaining is not necessary *hen
the phase appears (ery deep and stable" e(en though these could be
false sensations.
sing the necessary techni4ues too late.
6topping due to uncertainty about further actions" *hile there
must al*ays be a plan.
Forgetting that it is possible to fall asleep in the phase *ithout
reali?ing it. Recogni?ing the ris! of falling asleep must be a primary
focus.
5etting pulled into e(ents occurring in the phase instead of
obser(ing and controlling them from the outside.
Forgetting that techni4ues for #maintaining$ must al*ays be used
to remain in as deep a phase as possible" and not 'ust for maintaining
any odd state.
6topping the use of techni4ues for #maintaining$ during contact
*ith li(ing ob'ects" *hen the techni4ues must be used constantly.
.ounting *ithout the desire to count as high as possible.
Performing imagined rotation instead of real rotation.
Passi(eness and calmness instead of constant acti(ity.
E&cessi(e thin!ing and internal dialogue *hen these should be
!ept to an absolute minimum.
Exercises for Chater /
=uestions
1. 0hat is a foul1
-. 0hat is the minimum duration of the phase1
:. 0hat do phase maintenance (#maintaining$) techni4ues
counteract besides fouls and falling asleep1
<. 0hy might a practitioner thin! that the phase has ended *hen it
actually is still in progress1
=. 6hould #maintaining$ techni4ues al*ays be used1
>. 0hat primary techni4ues *or! against the occurrence of fouls1
@. 8o* can a practitioner hoo! onto the phase1
A. 0hile in the phase" *hat do thoughts about the body lead to1
B. 0hat 4uestion should be as!ed in the phase in order to reduce the
probability of falling asleep1
1C. 0hat happens to an ob'ect during hyper%concentration1
11. 8o* else" apart from hyper%concentration" might a practitioner
effecti(ely recogni?e a false foul1
1-. 0hile in the phase" is it permitted to loo! into the distance for a
long time1
1:. 0hat is +9 and ho* does the degree of it affect the duration of a
phase e&perience1
1<. 0hat should a practitioner al*ays do after an inad(ertent return
into the body1
&as$s
1. 9uring the ne&t fe* phases" dedicate yourself to the single
goal of maintaining as long as possible" using as many
maintaining techni4ues as you can.
-. Figure out *hich techni4ues ha(e pro(en the most effecti(e
and comfortable for you" so that you may use these later.
:. +ncrease the duration of your a(erage phase to at least :
minutes (e(aluated ob'ecti(ely).
Chater 0 - Primary s$ills
&9E ESSE,CE O2 P:I-6:Y S>I<<S
0hen dealing *ith a fully%reali?ed phase" re4uisite !no*ledge is not
limited to entry techni4ues" deepening and maintenance of the state"
translocation" or finding and interacting *ith ob'ects. +n order to feel
comfortable" a practitioner has to master or at least acclimate himself
*ith a *hole series of techni4ues to correctly react in any number of
situations. For e&ample" a practitioner needs to !no* ho* to create
(ision" if it is absent. 3ctions including passage through a *all or
ta!ing flight in a deep phase do not happen easily" although these
actions may be assumed natural occurrences" since the phase e&ists
apart from the physical *orld. +n addition to techni4ues that allo*
interaction *ith the physical setting and surroundings of the phase"
methods must learned and applied to counteract fear if it forces a
practitioner to consciously and consistently lea(e the phase.
3 practitioner does not ha(e to !no* all the primary s!ills by heart"
but it is necessary to pay close attention to some of them/ emergency
return" creation of (ision" translocation through ob'ects" contact *ith
animate ob'ects" and" for many" s!ills dedicated to fighting fear *ill
also pro(e e&tremely rele(ant.
The final choice of methods that re4uire added focus on the part of
the practitioner must be made on the basis of personal e&periences
and problems faced *hile in the phase" since different practitioners
often ha(e completely different types of problems.
)ISCE:,I,# &9E P96SE
Problems *ith phase identification during entry often arise at the
initial stages of studying the phase. 3 practitioner simply cannot
understand *hether or not he or she is already in the phase. This
uncertainty can manifest *hile lying do*n or *hile practicing in
other postures.
+f a practitioner is simply lying do*n" physically percei(ing his o*n
body" and doing nothing" then it is indeed difficult to determine
*hether or not he is present in the phase. +t is sufficient to note that
there might be no signs of a phase state. On the contrary" there may
be a host of signs and unusual sensations" but they by no means
necessarily indicate the onset of the phase.
The problem of the uncertainty of a phase state is al*ays sol(ed
through actions. +f the practitioner is lying do*n" then standard
separation techni4ues may produce indication of phase achie(ement %
in the ma'ority of cases I since such techni4ues may often be
incorrectly performed.
+t is possible to perform techni4ues that are only achie(able in the
phase state. +f a practitioner stands up and does not recogni?e his
surroundings" then it can be assumed that the practitioner is standing
up in the phase. 8o*e(er" often based on the obser(ation that
#e(erything is as in reality$" a practitioner may stand up and note that
e(erything is in fact #as in reality$ simply because the practitioner is
still in #reality$. +n ans*er to this dilemma" the phenomenon of
hyper%concentration has been pre(iously mentioned in relation to
maintaining phase. 7y using hyper%concentration" it is al*ays
possible to ascertain *hether the practitioner is in the phase.
8o*e(er" as a rule" hyper%concentration is rarely necessary. Most
often" the follo*ing signs indicate that separation has occurred in the
phase/ unusual sensations in the body during mo(ement" e&treme
tightness during mo(ement" a strong physical urge to lie bac! do*n"
dis'ointedness of surroundings" and blurred or complete absence of
(ision.
Often" the problem resides in the use of direct techni4ues *here the
practitioner e&pects fast results and attempts to determine *hether the
phase has been achie(ed. 3s a principle this should not be done.
0hen using direct techni4ues" the phase manifests itself clearlyJ
therefore" if an attempt to determine its presence is made" it is an
indicator that the phase is 4uite li!ely still far off.
E-E:#E,CY :E&U:,. P6:6<YSIS
6tatistics sho* that in one%third of initial phase e&periences" a
practitioner is faced *ith a degree of fear that forces a return to the
body. Periodically" e(en e&perienced practitioners face situations that
re4uire an abrupt return to *a!efulness. This presents a number of
concerns.
+n and of itself" returning to the body is almost al*ays
unproblematicJ remembering and thin!ing about the body often
suffices and *ithin moments the practitioner is returned to the body
from *hate(er location in the phase. 3dmittedly" it is ad(isable
during this type of situation to shut the eyes and abstain from
touching anything. 3s a rule" *hen these actions are performed"
simply standing up in the physical *orld is all that is re4uired to
complete a returnJ ho*e(er" this is not al*ays simply achie(ed.
6ometimes after reentering the body" the practitioner suddenly
reali?es that physical functionality has ceased due to the onset of
sleep paralysis" or the sensation that the body has been s*itched off.
9uring sleep paralysis" it is impossible to scream" call for help" or
e(en mo(e a finger. +n the ma'ority of cases" it is also impossible to
open the eyes. From a scientific point of (ie*" this is a case of an
abrupt" unnatural interruption of the rapid eye mo(ement (REM)
phase of sleep" during *hich this paralysis is al*ays present" and it
can persist for some time after the phase is interrupted.
This is *here it gets interesting. People in the physical *orld are
accustomed to an important rule/ if you *ish to achie(e something"
then do it" and do it as acti(ely as possible. This rule" though good" is
not al*ays applicable to certain conditions lin!ed to the phase" and
applies least of all to e&iting the phase. 6ometimes e&treme effort
ma!es it possible to brea! through sleep paralysis and resume
mo(ement" though most of these efforts tend to e&acerbate
immobility.
9ue to the unusual nature of a negati(e situation follo*ing a
deliberate" fear%induced return to the body" the depth of the phase
may greatly increase because of the bodyFs natural" protecti(e
inhibition of functions originating in the cerebral corte&J this results
in e(en greater agitation" greater fear. The paralysis gro*s stronger.
This is a (icious circle that leads to unpleasant feelings and emotions"
*hich may e(aporate any desire to practice the phase.
+gnorance of correct procedures has led to the *idespread opinion
that such ad(erse situations may ma!e it impossible to come bac!
from the phase at all. These opinions suppose that it is" therefore"
dangerous to get in(ol(ed *ith the practice. 8o*e(er" the solution to
this problem rests in (ery simple actions and procedures that can
pre(ent a large number of negati(e e&periences/
Comlete :elaxation
+n the section on deepening and maintaining" it *as noted that the
more acti(e a practitioner is *hile in the phase" the better.
.on(ersely" if there is less acti(ity" the 4uality of the phase declines"
allo*ing for an easy e&it. Thus" in order to lea(e the phase" the
practitioner only needs to completely rela& and ignore any percei(ed
sensations" actions" or thoughts. 3 practitioner may also recite a
prayer" mantra" or rhyme" since that helps the consciousness to be
distracted from the situation more 4uic!ly. Of course" one needs to
calm do*n and try to get rid of the fear" *hich in and of itself is
capable of !eeping such a state going. Periodically" the practitioner
should try to mo(e a finger in order to chec! *hether attempts at
rela&ation ha(e had an effect.
Concentration on a 2inger
3 practitioner e&periencing sleep paralysis should try mo(ing a
finger or a toe. 3t first this *onFt *or!" but the practitioner has to
concentrate precise thought and effort on the action. 3fter a little
*hile" the physical finger *ill begin to mo(e. The problem *ith this
techni4ue is that the practitioner may accidentally start ma!ing
phantom motions instead of physical mo(ements" *hich is *hy an
understanding of the difference bet*een the t*o sensations is
necessary" since it is often not (ery ob(ious.
Concentration on Possi3le -o?ements
The physiology of sleep paralysis" the phase state" and dreams are
such that *hen the practitioner is in one of these states" some actions
are al*ays associated *ith mo(ements made in the real body. This is
true *hen mo(ing the eyeballs" the tongue" or *hile breathing. +f the
practitioner concentrates attention on these processes" it is possible
counteract inhibitions to physical mo(ementJ as a result" a sleep%
paraly?ed practitioner *ill become able to mo(e in reality.
:ee?aluating the Situation
nder normal circumstances" deliberate e&it from the phase is not
the norm. 9eliberate e&it is commonly caused by certain fears and
pre'udices. +f a practitioner is not able to acti(ate the body using
other emergency return techni4ues" a careful consideration the
possibilities offered by the phase is recommended. There are many
interesting and useful things that can be e&perienced in the phase.
0hy ruin the possibility of great opportunity because of a baseless
fear1
To be fair" it must be noted that emergency e&it techni4ues do not
al*ays *or!. 3s a rule" after a long period of sleep depri(ation" or at
the beginning of or in the middle of a nightFs sleep" the urge to sleep
is so great that it is difficult to resist the sleep paralysis phenomenon.
+n this respect" ree(aluating the situation is highly recommended so
that a practitioner is able to ta!e ad(antage of the situation (ersus
suffering by it. 6leep paralysis is easily transmuted into a phase state
by means of indirect techni4ues.
By the &ay, +no&ing ho& to e#it paralysis is i$portant not only
for practitioners of the phase, since such paralysis occurs even
&ithout the phase for appro#i$ately one-third of the hu$an
population at least once in a lifeti$e( -t usually happens "efore or
after sleep(
2I#9&I,# 2E6:
Fear in the phase is a (ery common occurrence. The practitioner
may e&perience fear at any stage" although it is e&pressed much more
clearly during initial practice. The causes of fear are (ery di(erse/ a
feeling that returning to the body is impossibleJ a fear of deathJ
*orrying that something bad is going to happen to the bodyJ
encountering something scary and terrible in the phaseJ painful
sensationsJ o(erly sharp" hyper%realistic sensations. One fear
dominates all others/ the instinct of self%preser(ation" *hich" *ithout
any apparent reason" can induce a feeling of absolute horror I a
feeling that cannot be e&plained or controlled.
For a no(ice stric!en by insurmountable fear that causes
paralysis" there is only one *ay to gradually o(ercome. Each time a
no(ice enters the phase" an attempt should be made to go a step
further than the pre(ious time. For e&ample" in spite of feeling
terrified" the practitioner should try to raise the hands and then mo(e
them bac! to the initial position. The second time" the practitioner
should attempt to sit do*n. The third time" standing up should be
attempted. The fourth time" *al!ing around in the phase is ad(ised.
Then" after incremental steps to*ard e&periencing the harmlessness
of the phase state" producti(e" calm action may ensue.
Interesting fact!
Fear itself can "e used to enter the phase and re$ain there for a
long ti$e( Once fears are allayed, a cal$ed practitioner is
e#periences increased difficulty &ith entry into the phase(

For a practitioner *ho faces periodical fears" reali?ing that there is
no real danger encourages progress in practice. rges to rapidly
return to the body are then made baseless. 6ooner or later" calmer
thought dominates e(ents in the phase" and fear happens less often.
0hen dealing *ith momentary fear caused by e(ents in the phase"
the simplest solution is to tac!le it head%on and follo* through to the
end in order to a(oid a fear%dri(en precedent. +f a practitioner al*ays
runs a*ay from undesirable e(ents" the e(ents *ill occur more and
more fre4uently. +f a practitioner is incapable of facing fear in the
phase" it is best to use the translocation techni4ue to tra(el else*here"
although this solution only produces temporary relief.
C:E6&IO, O2 @ISIO,
;ision is often a(ailable at the (ery beginning of a phase"
especially *hen the practitioner uses image obser(ation and
(isuali?ation techni4ues to enter. 6ometimes (ision appears *ithin
the first fe* seconds. Other times" it manifests during the deepening
process. 8o*e(er" there are cases *here (ision is not a(ailable and
must be created 4uic!ly" at any cost. ;ision may arri(e as soon as it is
thought about" but if this does not occur" a special techni4ue is
necessary.
To create (ision" a practitioner needs to bring the hands four to si&
inches in front of the eyes and try to detect them through the grayness
or dar!ness. Peering aggressi(ely and attenti(ely at the minute details
of the palms *ill cause them to appear" much li!e they are being
de(eloped on Polaroid film. 3fter se(eral seconds" (ision *ill
become clear" and along *ith the palms" the surroundings *ill also
become (isible.
nder no circumstances should the physical eyelids be opened.
;ision *ill appear on its o*n and *ill not differ from that of reality
and the physical sensation of opened eyes *ill emerge. +t is possible
to shut the eyes in the phase an infinite number of times" e(en
*ithout ha(ing opened them at all" since the latter is not needed for
creating (ision. The physical eyelids may be open only *hile
e&periencing a (ery deep phase. +n a shallo* phase" opening the eyes
*ill cause a return to *a!efulness.
The practitioner must also !eep in mind that (ision should only
be created after a complete separation from the body and a
subse4uent translocation has been achie(ed. 3ttempting to (ie* the
hands during flight or *hile ho(ering in an unidentified space leads
to arbitrary translocation.
CO,&6C& WI&9 <I@I,# OBGEC&S
T*o problems may surface *hile con(ersing *ith animate ob'ects
in the phase/ silence or a return to the body. +n (ie* of the fact that
many phase applications are based on contact *ith people for one
purpose or another" it is necessary to understand ho* to correctly
manage contact *ith li(ing ob'ects.
+n order to a(oid a foul (e'ection from the phase into reality)" the
elementary rules of #maintaining$ must be obser(ed. 3cti(ely
obser(ing the facial features or clothing of a person you *ant to
communicate *ith. 0hile communicating" the practitioner should
constantly rub the hands together or maintain strong (ibrations by
straining the brain. Remember to perform the techni4ues to a(oid
becoming absorbed in communication.
3 more comple& problem is o(ercoming the communicati(e
unresponsi(eness of ob'ects in the phase. +n many cases" the speech
of an ob'ect is bloc!ed by the internal stress of the practitioner.
6ometimes the problem stems from an e&pectation that an ob'ect *ill
not be able to communicate in the phase.
+t is important to treat the ob'ects in a calm manner. There is no
use trying to shout or beat the ob'ect to force communication. On the
contrary" it is much more effecti(e to treat the ob'ect gently" *ithout
applying pressure. 9o not peer at an ob'ectFs mouth" e&pecting
sounds to emerge. +t is better to loo! else*hereJ ta!ing a passi(e
interest in communication generally yields the best results.
3s a rule" the first time that communication *ith a li(ing ob'ect is
successful" future attempts go unhindered.
.ommunication methods in the phase are should be no different
than those used in ordinary life/ tal!ing" facial e&pressions" gesturing
*ith the hands" body language. Telepathy is not necessary.
:E6)I,#
Reading te&t in the phase may be accompanied by a number of
difficulties. First" small print becomes illegible because the affects of
hyper%concentration may distort te&t. This problem is sol(ed by using
large%font te&tual sources of information. For e&ample" the te&t of a
normal boo! blurs *hen obser(ed too attenti(ely" but the large font
on the co(er of a boo! is easily read since its si?e is sufficient for
rapid reading *ithout detailed scrutiny.
The second problem encountered *hile reading in the phase is
*hen te&t is legible but is completely meaningless in compositionJ
gibberish. This problem is sol(ed by turning o(er the pages" loo!ing
for a readable message. +t is also possible to find another copy or
create it ane* using the ob'ect%finding techni4ues. The same applies
to cases *here the te&t is seen as a set of incomprehensible symbols
or signs.
0hile reading in the phase" the practitioner should not forget
about performing #maintaining$ techni4ues to pre(ent a foul by
becoming too rela&ed.

@IB:6&IO,S
The phase is often accompanied by an unforgettably unusual
sensation that may be used successfully to enter" deepen or maintain
the phase. +t is difficult to describe it better than the sensation of a
hea(y current passing through the entire body *ithout causing any
pain. +t may also feel li!e the *hole body is contracting" or a tingling
sensation similar to numbness. Most often" the sensations are similar
to high%fre4uency (ibrations of the body" *hich e&plains the origin of
the term #(ibration$.
+f the practitioner is not sure *hether or not he e&perienced
(ibrations" then there is a good method to sol(e his problem/ if he
really did" he *ill not ha(e any doubts about it. +n all other cases"
*hen there are doubts and uncertainty" the practitioner is definitely
not dealing *ith (ibrations" or is dealing *ith another form thereof.
+f you ha(e e&perienced (ibrations at least once" the recollection of
these sensations helps greatly during the simultaneous application of
indirect techni4ues. They are created" supported and strengthened by
straining the brain or tensing the body *ithout using the muscles. For
(ibrations to appear" it often suffices merely to thin! about them.
9uring the first e&perience" one should e&periment *ith them for a
*hile by rolling them around the body and its parts" as *ell as
strengthening and *ea!ening them.
0o&ever, one should not thin+ that the presence of vi"rations is a
necessary condition for "eing in the phase( Many no(ices often stri(e
not for the phase but for (ibrations" after *hich the former must
supposedly follo*. That should not be the case. There are indeed
specific techni4ues that ma!e it possible to get into the phase by
creating (ibrations" but in all other cases they are not necessary and
some practitioners may ne(er ha(e them at all.
&EC9,I=UES 2O: &:6,S<OC6&I,#
&9:OU#9 OBGEC&S
+n a deep phase" the properties of the surrounding en(ironment
become (ery similar to the physical *orld. 8o*e(er" it may
sometimes be necessary to pass through a *all or translocate to a(oid
a physical barrier in the phase. There are t*o basic options for
passing through barriers li!e *alls. sually" mastering these re4uires
se(eral attempts.
Interesting fact!
-f a practitioner concentrates on the physical
sensations associated &ith passing through a &all,
it is possi"le to get stuc+( % practitioner $ay even
e#perience the feeling of o"structed "reathing &hen
this happens( %t such a ti$e it is necessary to return
to the "ody(
:aid )efocused Penetration
Run or 'ump at a *all *ith a burning desire to penetrate it. 9onFt
focus on the *allJ instead concentrate on the immediate
surroundings. 9o not try to ta!e anything from the current location
since this may impede a successful passage through the *all.
&he Closed Eyes &echni'ue
0hen approaching a *all" the practitioner must close his eyes and
completely focus on a desire to pass through it *hile imagining that
the *all does not e&ist" or that it is transparent and penetrable.
6urface resistance should be pressed through" continuing on *ith the
aggressi(e desire and concentration.
2<I#9&
Ta!ing flight in the phase is a simple matter of remembering past
dreams of flight. )othing needs to be tensed" no *ord need to be
said. 3ttempting flight *ith closed eyes produces a high rate of
success" but presents an increased probability of inad(ertent
translocation.
+f a flight attempt is unsuccessful" a practitioner may try 'umping
from a high ele(ation or from a *indo*. The natural instinct of
dream flight ta!es o(er and the fall becomes a controlled flight.
8o*e(er" 'umping from *indo*s or other ele(ations is ad(isable
only to practitioners *ith e&perience" since no(ices may not al*ays
be able to determine *hether they are in the phase or in reality.
3nother *ay to fly is to try to suspend oneself in the air *hen
'umping up.
SUPE:-6BI<I&IES
The realism of the phase space does not impose limits on the
ability to perform actions that cannot be performed in the physical
*orld. +t is important to remember that only a practitionerFs
apprehension places limits on *hat may be done in the phase.
For e&ample" if a practitioner needs to get to a location % e(en
(ery far a*ay % it may be reached by teleportation. +f an ob'ect needs
to be mo(ed from one side of the room to the other" it may be mo(ed
by tele!inesis. One of the ma'or benefits of the phase e&perience is
unencumbered freedom of action.
To master unusual abilities" only a fe* phases need to be spent in
concentrated de(elopment of the methods.
&ele$inesis
+n order to learn tele!inesis (mo(ing ob'ect by thought)" the
practitioner concentrate on an ob'ect *hile e&periencing a deepened
phase" and attempt to mo(e the ob'ect by thin!ing about the
mo(ement. The only re4uired action is aggressi(e (isuali?ation of the
ob'ectFs mo(ement. )o specific e&ternal actions are re4uired.
Tele!inetic ability is inherent to e(ery human being. +f attempts are
unsuccessful at first" press on. 7efore too long" the full effect of the
practitionerFs *ill yield results. sing this ability helps to encourage
a good phase e&perience by pro(iding a tool for carrying out planned
tas!s.
Pyro$inesis
+gniting an ob'ect in the phase 'ust by staring at it re4uires a
strong desire to heat up and set fire to the ob'ect. Performed
successfully" an ob'ect *ill smo!e" distort" dar!en and then burst into
flames.
&eleathy
To de(elop telepathy in the phase" it is necessary to peer at
animate ob'ects *hile listening surrounding e&ternal and internal
sounds *ith the intention of hearing thoughts e&pressed by thought.
E(en e&perienced practitioners encounter difficulty *hile de(eloping
telepathy" but *hen successful" contact *ith people in the phase is
substantially simplified. sing telepathy" discerning the thoughts of
people" animals" and ob'ects is possible. 8o*e(er" this should not be
ta!en too seriously" since it is merely the nature of the phase to
simulate *hat is e&pected.

&ransmutation
Transforming an ob'ectFs form re4uires the techni4ue of
transmutation (refer to .hapter B). +t should also be noted that if the
goal is not to con(ert something but rather to transform oneself" then
it is necessary to use the translocation techni4ues (also described in
.hapter B)" *hereby attention has to be concentrated not on the
desired place but on the desired form. 8ere again there are no
limitations apart from indi(idual courage and fantasy. +t is possible to
become a butterfly or a dinosaur. +t is possible to become a bird or a
*orm. +tFs e(en possible to become a child or a person of the
opposite se&. These are not simply e&ternal changes" but real
transmutations" *ithin and *ithout. +f a practitioner becomes a
butterfly" it accompanies the sensation of ha(ing *ings" many legs"
and an unusual body. The practitioner *ill intuiti(ely !no* ho* to
control each part of this ne* body. This is a superficial description of
the transmutation e&perience" *hich ob(iously defies a customary
understanding of reality.
&9E I-PO:&6,CE O2 CO,2I)E,CE
3 crucial factor in de(eloping phase abilities is self%confidence in
the ability to use the s!ills. +nitially" these abilities are absent because
the human brain" tuned in to ordinariness" bloc!s confidence in the
ability to do anything unusual. 3s soon as strong confidence is
reached in the performance of phase abilities" all others become easy
to achie(e.
3lthough confidence in phase abilities may gro* strong"
practitioners should remain soundly a*are that abilities in the phase
are limited to the phase. 3ttempting tele!inesis" pyro!inesis" or
transmutation in the real *orld is a *aste of time and energy.

CO,&:O<<I,# P6I,
3long *ith all the positi(e e&periences and sensations that may be
en'oy in the phase" painful e&periences nature may also manifest.
Punching a *all in a deep phase state *ill cause the same pain as if a
*all had been struc! in physical reality.
6ome actions in the phase may una(oidably cause unpleasant
feelings of painJ therefore" it is necessary to !no* ho* to a(oid
painful actions. Focusing on an internal confidence that pain *ill not
result from an action *ill alle(iate the problem. 3 practitioner may
e&periment *ith this type of focus by pummeling a *all *hile
resol(ing that there is no pain. +f the e&periment succeeds" then
obtaining the same result *ill ne(er again re4uire the same le(el of
effortJ thin!ing that the phase is painless *ill suffice.
-O:6< S&6,)6:)S I, &9E P96SE
From the (ery beginning" it should be understood that the moral
compass of phase space has nothing in common *ith the properties
and la*s in the physical *orld that promulgate reality. The phase
space seemingly imitates the physical *orld *ith all its properties
and functions only because *e are used to percei(ing it and are not
e&pecting anything else. Moral principles and rules apply only to the
place *here these ha(e been. +t does not ma!e sense to follo* the
same rules *hile in the phase.
The practitioner should not refrain from certain actions in the
phase because some *ould be unacceptable" improper" or bad in the
real *orld. These are merely beha(ioral patterns that are unfounded
in the *orld of the phase" *here e(erything operates on the basis of
entirely different la*s.
The only moral rules that might e&ist in the phase are those that the
practitioner establishes. +f desired" complete" unhindered freedom
may be e&perienced.
S&U)YI,# POSSIBI<I&IES 6,) SE,S6&IO,S
)o(ice practitioners should not immediately rush to*ards a single
specific goal if long%term practice is desired. +t is better to
e&tensi(ely in(estigate the phase and its surroundings before
focusing on accomplishment. This *ill build intimacy *ith the
e&perience and allo* unhindered entry and interaction *ith the
phase.
3s in reality" learning *hate(er first re(eals itself is the !ey to
increasing and speciali?ing !no*ledge. 3 beginning practitioner
should at first en'oy the simple fact of actually being in the phase"
then lean its details and functions. Once inside the phase" a
practitioner should e&plore it" e&amining and interacting *ith
e(erything encountered.
8e should also try to fully sharpen all the possible feelings in the
phase in order to fully understand ho* unusual the phase is in its
realism. 3 practitioner must e&perience mo(ement/ *al!ing" running"
'umping" flying" falling" s*imming. Test the sensations of pain by
stri!ing a *all *ith a fist. The simplest *ay to e&perience taste
sensations is to get to the refrigerator and try to eat e(erything that
you find there" at the same time not forgetting to smell each item.
0al! through the *alls" translocate" create and handle ob'ects.
E&plore. 3ll these actions are (ery interesting in and of themsel(es.
The possibilities really are infinite. 8o*e(er" only *hen they are *ell
understood and thoroughly e&plored can it be said that the
practitioner really !no*s *hat the phase is about.
&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES WI&9 P:I-6:Y S>I<<S
0hen trying to discern *hether or not a phase is intact" a
'udgment is based on a similarity to the departed physical
en(ironment. +n the phase" physical attributes are simulations.
8yper%concentrating on an ob'ect for too short a time *hile trying
to determine *hether the surroundings are in the phase or in the
physical *orld.
9eliberately attempting to end the phase prematurely *hen the
entire natural length of the phase should be ta!en ad(antage of.
Panic in case of paralysis instead of calm" rela&ed action.
Refusal to practice the phase because of fear" though this problem
is temporary and resol(able.
Opening the eyes at the initial stages of the phase since this
fre4uently leads to a foul.
Premature attempts to create (ision in the phase" *hereas
separating from the body and deepening should occur.
E&cessi(e haste *hile creating (ision although in the ma'ority of
cases (ision appears naturally.
0hile concentrating on the hands to create (ision" doing so at an
e&cessi(e distance (ersus the recommended four to si& inches.
Forgetting about the techni4ues for #maintaining$ *hile in
contact *ith li(ing ob'ects.
Forgetting to shut the eyes or defocusing (ision *hen
translocating through *alls or other solid ob'ects.
9esiring to do something superhuman in the phase *ithout the
re4uired internal desire and confidence.
Fear of e&periencing pain in the phase instead of learning to
control it.
Obser(ing moral standards in the phase *hen they do not apply.
3 tendency to immediately use the phase for something practical
instead of first thoroughly e&ploring and interacting *ith the
surroundings.
Exercises for Chater 0
=uestions
1. 3re there s!ills in the phase that must first be mastered before
the phase may be used to its full e&tent1
-. +s it possible to understand *hether a phase is intact by
attempting to fly1
:. 8as a practitioner most li!ely gotten up in the phase or in
reality if there are doubts about this1
<. +s it sufficient to thin! about the body in order to return to it"
and is it only re4uired to return into the body in order to control
it1
=. 0hich arm should be acti(ely and aggressi(ely mo(ed to
o(ercome sleep paralysis1
>. +s it possible to tell 'o!es to oneself to o(ercome sleep
paralysis1
@. +s it possible to mo(e the physical eyes *hile in the phase1
A. 0hat should be done if sleep paralysis cannot be o(ercome1
B. .an sleep paralysis occur *ithout practicing the phase1
1C. 0hat if fear is not addressed and con4uered1
11. +s it possible to gradually master the phase in order to
o(ercome fear1
1-. +s there cause for fear of anything in the phase1
1:. 3t *hat point can (ision be created in the phase by opening
the eyelids and not through the use of special techni4ues1
1<. 0hat *ould happen *ith an attempt to open the eyes after
sitting up in bed" i.e." before becoming completely separated from
the phase1
1=. 0hy may contact *ith li(ing ob'ects in the phase cause a
return to the body1
1>. 0hat problems might occur if a practitioner studies the mouth
of a tal!ing ob'ect1
1@. +n the phase" ho* 4uic!ly can small te&t be read1
1A. 0hich is easier to read in the phase/ te&t in a ne*spaper or
te&t on a large billboard1
1B. +s it possible to see hieroglyphs instead of te&t *hile reading
in the phase1
-C. +s it possible to burst through a *all after running up to it *ith
the eyes shut1
-1. 0hich muscles of the body must be tensed to start flying in
the phase1
--. 3re there any e&trasensory abilities that are inaccessible in the
phase1
-:. .an a practitioner transform into a ball *hile in the phase1
-<. 8o* does pain in the phase differ from pain in the physical
*orld1
-=. 6hould a practitioner gi(e up a seat to an elderly person *hile
in the phase1
->. 9ue to moral considerations" *hat is prohibited in the phase1
&as$s
1. 9uring your ne&t phase session" *al! around your home
in(estigating the rooms" !itchen" and bathroom in detail.
-. 2earn to pass through *alls. .ompletely dedicate one long
phase e&perience to perfecting this s!ill.
:. 2earn to fly in the phase.
<. 0hile in a deep phase" learn to control pain by hitting a *all
*ith your fist.
=. 0hile in the phase" learn tele!inesis (the ability to mo(e
ob'ects by thought) and pyro!inesis (setting ob'ects on fire" also
performed by thought).
>. 9edicate a lengthy phase e&perience to an e&periment *ith
(ision/ create it if it is not already a(ailable" and then shut your
eyes and recreate (ision. 9o this at least ten times o(er the course
of a single phase
@. 5et ob'ects in the phase to start tal!ing.
A. 9edicate a long phase to searching for different !inds of te&ts
in order to e&periment *ith reading (arious si?e fonts.
Chater 1 - &ranslocation and 2inding O34ects
&9E ESSE,CE O2 &:6,S<OC6&IO,
6,) 2I,)I,# OBGEC&S
2i!e e(eryday reality" the phase space cannot be used for certain
purposes if it is not !no*n ho* to mo(e around and find necessary
things. +n a *a!eful state" it is more or less !no*n *here something
is located and ho* to reach it. +n the phase the same assumptions
cannot apply since phase mechanisms *or! by different principles.
The reason for addressing translocation and finding ob'ects in the
same chapter is because both techni4ues rely on the same mechanics
that ma!e the e&istence of these techni4ues possible. +n other *ords"
the same methods % *ith minor e&ceptions % can be applied to both
translocation and finding.
3fter studying the techni4ues described in this chapter" a
practitioner in the phase *ill be able to go to any location and find
any ob'ect. The only limitations that e&ist are those of the
imagination and desireJ if these are unlimited" so are the possibilities.
Regarding translocation" attention should not be focused on
methods for tra(elling through nearby spaces. For e&ample" a
practitioner may simply *al! into an ad'acent room" or out to the
street (ia the corridor or through the *indo*. These are natural" easy
actions. 3 practitioner should instead concentrate attention on ho* to
mo(e to remote destinations that cannot be 4uic!ly reached by
physical means.
+t is important to mention the necessary safety procedures for
translocation. 6ometimes" due to a lac! of e&perience" a practitioner
may mista!e the phase for reality" and reality may be mista!en for the
phase. Mista!ing the phase for reality implies no danger since a
practitioner simply belie(es that an entry attempt *as unsuccessful.
8o*e(er" if reality is mista!en for the phase" a practitioner may
perform dangerous or e(en life%threatening actions. For e&ample"
after getting out of bed in a *a!eful state" thin!ing that e(erything is
happening in the phase" a beginner may approach a *indo* and 'ump
out of it" e&pecting to fly" as is customary in the phase. For this
reason alone" shortcuts to flight should only be ta!en after gaining a
le(el of e&perience that ma!es it possible to unambiguously
distinguish the phase from a *a!eful state.
+f a glitch occurs *hen practicing translocation techni4ues (for
e&ample" landing in the *rong place)" a practitioner should simply
repeat the techni4ue until the desired result is obtained. Either *ay"
initial training is a must in order to ma!e e(erything easier for you
later on.
3s far as ob'ect%finding techni4ues are concerned" these are used
for both inanimate and animate ob'ects. +n other *ords" these
techni4ues are e4ually effecti(e for finding" for e&ample" a person or
a utensil. 8o*e(er" there are se(eral techni4ues that are only suitable
for finding li(ing ob'ects.
B6SIC P:OPE:&Y O2 &9E P96SE SP6CE
3ll methods for controlling the phase space stem from a primary
la*/ the degree of changeability of the phase space is in(ersely
proportionate to the depth of the phase and the stability of its ob'ects.
That is" the deeper and more stable the phase" the more difficult it is
to perform something unusual in it because in a deep" stable phase"
the la*s of it begin to closely resemble those of the physical *orld.

3ll translocation and finding ob'ects techni4ues are based on the
!no*ledge of methods that bypass the primary la*. The secret lies in
the fact that not only phase depth affects the controllability of the
phase" but so does phase stability" *hich in turn depends to a large
e&tent on the number of sensations e&perienced in the phase. The
techni4ues for translocation and finding ob'ects are used *hen these
e&perienced sensations are *ea!ened through certain actions.
+n other *ords" if a practitioner located in the phase holds a red
pencil and e&amines it" tactile and (isual perceptions are engaged"
*hich under sharp agitation cause the ob'ect to e&ist in its complete
form. 8o*e(er" as soon as the eyes are shut" the stability of pencil
image *ea!ens. +n this situation" it *ill be enough for the practitioner
(after sufficient training) to concentrate on belie(ing that the pencil is
dar!%blue in order for it to appear dar! blue after opening the eyes.
This phenomenon occurs because the color of the pencil is no longer
determined by perceptual areas of the brain and" therefore" it is
possible to change it.
+f a red pencil is placed on a table and the practitionerFs eyes are
shut" and there is concentration on a thought that the pencil is no
longer on the table" then after opening the eyes" the practitioner *ill
find that the pencil has disappeared. +n essence" *hen the pencil is
lying on the table and the practitionerFs eyes are closed" and the
pencil is not being held" no perception is being in(ested in the pencil"
*hich the practitioner deletes using autosuggestion.
sing certain techni4ue%related methods" a practitioner may cause
the stability of the phase state to remain in flu& using techni4ues that
best suit the practitionerFs indi(idual personality.
&EC9,I=UES 2O: &:6,S<OC6&IO,
&ranslocation through &eleortation
This is one of the simplest and most accessible techni4ues that
beginners should use right a*ay. To apply it" shut the eyes (if (ision
is present)" and then concentrate attention on a thought%form or image
of a location else*here in the phase. 3t this moment" there *ill be a
string sensation of s*ift flight and *ithin t*o to 1C seconds" the
destination *ill be reached.
The success of this techni4ue depends on a strong concentration
upon a single goal/ the desired location. Practice must be performed
(ery clearly" confidently" aggressi(ely" and *ithout distractions. 3ny
unrelated thoughts ha(e a profoundly negati(e influence on the
performance of this techni4ue. They unnecessarily prolong the flight"
cause a foul" or result in arri(ing at an undesired location.
&ranslocation through a )oor
+n order to use this techni4ue" approach any door *ith the strong
belief that it leads to the re4uired location. 3fter opening the door" the
practitioner *ill see and be able to step into the destination. +f the
door *as originally open" it must be completely shut before applying
the techni4ue.
3 dra*bac! to this techni4ue is that its practice al*ays re4uires a
door. +f there is no door" users of this translocation techni4ue should
create one using an ob'ect finding techni4ue.
&ranslocation through &eleortation 8ith the Eyes Oen
This techni4ue is difficult because it re4uires an unstable phase
space caused by a strong desire to translocate to another location.
9uring teleportation by teleportation *ith eyes shut" the practitioner
disengages from the current location. 0hereas during teleportation
by flight *ith eyes shut the practitioner disentangles himself from the
current location" that is not the case here. Therefore" this techni4ue
should be used only by e&perienced practitioners *ho are confident
that they are capable of remaining in the phase.
3s far as implementing the techni4ue is concerned" the practitioner
simply needs to stop and concentrate on the thought that he is already
present in the desirable location and focus on its image. +t is
important to not stare at or touch anything during the thought.
6urrounding space *ill dim" blur and then disappear during this time"
and then the intended location *ill gradually start to appear. The rate
of space metamorphosis depends on the degree of desire to reach the
re4uired location.
+f concentration is *ea! or phase depth is poor" then after space
destabili?es" it may not be restored % and a return to the *a!eful state
*ill occur.
&ranslocation 8ith Closed Eyes
This is one of the easiest techni4ues. To use this techni4ue" the
practitioner simply needs to shut the eyes and ha(e an intense desire
that" *hen the eyes are ne&t opened" the re4uired location *ill be
reached. +n order to considerably increase the effecti(eness of this
techni4ue" it *ould be useful to imagine" at the moment you close
your eyes" that you ha(e already reached the desired location.
Translocation must occur then" and it has to happen *ithout the flight
sensations that occur during teleportation *ith closed eyes.
Translocation must occur right then" and it has to happen *ithout the
flight that occurs in teleportation *ith closed eyes" *hich must be
a(oided.
&ranslocation 3y Concentration on a :emote O34ect
To perform this techni4ue" the practitioner should peer from a
distance at a minor detail of the desired location. The greater an
intention to see an ob'ectFs detail" the 4uic!er the arri(al at the
ob'ectFs location.
3 dra*bac! to this techni4ue is that this type of translocation is
possible only for places that are already (isible" albeit from a great
distance.
&ranslocation during Searation
The simplest *ay to translocate is to do so *hile separating from
the body. Employing this techni4ue is e&tremely simple and (ery
con(enient. +t may be combined *ith almost any separation
techni4ue and is performed by focusing on the image and feel of a
desired location during the initial stages of e&iting the body. +t is e(en
better to imagine that phase entry *ill occur and separation *ill
complete in a chosen location.
Interesting fact!
%fter having changed his place of residence, the
practitioner &ill very often continue for so$e ti$e
to separate fro$ the "ody in the sa$e house &here
he &as used to doing this previously(
3 dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that separation occurs only in the
beginning of the phase e&perience and" therefore" can only be used
once. Other options should be considered after the first translocation.
&ranslocation 3y Passing through a Wall
This techni4ue is performed by *al!ing or flying through a *all
*ith the eyes shut and a firm con(iction that the re4uired location is
behind the *all. The barrier does not necessarily ha(e to be a *all. +t
can be any non%transparent ob'ect through *hich a practitioner may
*al! or fly/ a screen" a *ardrobe" and so on.
The main dra*bac! of this techni4ue is the necessity of
appropriate s!ills for penetrating through solid ob'ects of the phase.
3nother necessary condition for applying this techni4ue is the
presence of barriers to pass through.
&ranslocation through )i?ing
This techni4ue is identical to passing through *alls *ith the only
difference being instead of a *all % *hich may not al*ays be
a(ailable % the practitioner *ill use the floor or the ground. The
practitioner must di(e headfirst *ith the eyes shut and ha(e complete
confidence that the re4uired location is underneath the solid surface.
The ability to pass through solid ob'ects is" naturally" also re4uired.
3 practitioner may di(e through the floor or the ground" and also
into any flat hori?ontal surface/ a table" a chair" a bed" and so forth.
&ranslocation through :otation
3pply this techni4ue" a practitioner in the phase *ill to start
rotating on an a&is *hile simultaneously concentrating on a belief
that a desired location *ill be reached once rotation is stopped. The
eyes must be shut during the rotation" or (ision must not be focused
on anything in particular. 3s a rule" t*o to fi(e re(olutions on an a&is
are sufficient. Once again" e(erything depends on the ability to fully
concentrate on a desired goal *ithout any distractions.
OBGEC& 2I,)I,# &EC9,I=UES
&echni'ue of &ranslocation
3ll translocation techni4ues are also applicable to ob'ect finding
techni4ues since the use of both techni4ues re4uires altering the
surrounding the space. +nstead of concentrating on a location" the
practitioner is to focus on the specific detail of a space that is to be
found or changed. 3s a result" finding the necessary ob'ect (pro(ided
this techni4ue has been mastered) is guaranteed" but maintaining the
original location *here the action begins is not guaranteed.
+f the goal is to find an ob'ect *hile remaining in the present
location" use the speciali?ed techni4ues described later on/ techni4ues
that change only a portion of the phase space.
2inding 3y Calling a ,ame
This techni4ue is only used to find li(ing ob'ects. The practitioner
must call a person or an animal by name to cause the animate phase
resident to enter or appear nearby. The call should be loud" nearly a
shout" other*ise it *ill not al*ays *or!. 5enerally" it is often enough
to pronounce a name se(eral times to achie(e results.
+f the desired animate ob'ect does not ha(e a name or the
practitioner does not !no* it" then any name or general summoning
*ill do" li!e" #.ome hereH$ This should be done *hile mentally
focusing on a clear image of the desired person or animal.
2inding 3y In'uiry
To perform this techni4ue" approach any person in the phase and
as! him (or her) *here to 4uic!ly find a desired ob'ect. 3n accurate
ans*er is usually gi(en straight a*ay" and it should be follo*ed.
8o*e(er" to a(oid *asting time" do not forget to mention that the
ob'ect must be found #4uic!ly$" or specify that the ob'ect should be
#nearby$. 9uring this communication" under no circumstances should
there be a doubt about the accuracy of the information" since
other*ise it may lead to a simulation of *hat is e&pected.
The dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that it re4uires the presence of
an animate person and good s!ill at communicating *ith ob'ects in
the phase" *hich can pro(e difficult.
2inding 3y &urning 6round
+n order to use this techni4ue" the practitioner must concentrate
and imagine that the re4uired ob'ect is located some*here behind his
bac!" and after turning around he *ill actually see it there" e(en if it
*as not there 'ust a moment earlier. This *or!s best if the
practitioner" prior to turning around" did not (ie* the place *here the
ob'ect is e&pected to appear.
2inding 6round a Corner
0hen approaching any corner" concentrate and imagine the
re4uired ob'ect is 'ust around the corner. Then" after turning the
corner" the ob'ect *ill be found. 3nything that limits space (isibility
may be regarded as a corner. This does not ha(e to be the corner of a
house or another type of buildingJ it could be the corner of a
*ardrobe" the corner of a truc!" etc.
The dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that it re4uires the a(ailability
of a sufficiently large corner that bloc!s the (ie* of anything around
the other side of it.
2inding in the 9and
This techni4ue is" in essence" only applicable to finding ob'ects
that can fit in or be held by the hand. To perform this techni4ue"
concentrate on the idea that the ob'ect is already in hand. 3t that
moment" the practitioner must not loo! at it. 6oon after beginning to
concentrate on this idea" the practitioner *ill at first feel a slight
sensation of the ob'ect lying in his hand" follo*ed by a full sensation
and appearance of the desired ob'ect.
2inding 3y &ransmutation
This techni4ue distorts the phase space *hile not completely
disengaging a perception of the space. The practitioner must gi(e
strong attention to a thought that a re4uired ob'ect is going to appear
in a desired location. There must be sufficient confidence that the
practitionerFs desires *ill be reali?ed. 3t this moment" the process of
metamorphosis *ill begin/ space *ill distort and dim" and the
re4uired ob'ect *ill begin to manifest itself. 3fter this" brightness and
focus *ill be restored *ith necessary alterations made present in the
phase space.
This techni4ue is relati(ely difficult to perform in comparison to
others" and" therefore" it is better to use it only after a high le(el of
e&perience has been reached because it is difficult to remain in the
phase during any metamorphic process.
3s is e(ident in the name of this techni4ue" it can be used to find
ob'ects and also create ne* ob'ects from found ob'ects.

&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES WI&9 &:6,S<OC6&IO,
6,) 2I,)I,# OBGEC&S
3pplying translocation and ob'ect finding techni4ues *ithout the
precondition of a steady phase.
+nsufficient concentration on a desire to tra(el to a location or to
find an ob'ect.
9oubting that results *ill be achie(ed instead of ha(ing complete
confidence.
Passi(e performance of the techni4ues instead of a strong desire
and high le(el of aggression.
Forgetting to repeat translocation or ob'ect finding techni4ues
*hen the techni4ue did not *or! or *or!ed incorrectly during the
first attempt.
5etting distracted by e&traneous thoughts during the lengthy
process of teleporting *ith eyes shut. Total concentration is re4uired
at all times.
3pplying the techni4ue of teleportation *ith eyes open *ithout
ade4uate e&perience.
Failing to immediately translocate *hen using the closed eyes
techni4ueJ this may induce flying a la the teleportation techni4ue.
5lossing o(er minute details or only obser(ing the broad features
of a remote ob'ect *hile applying translocation by concentration.
3 delayed desire to mo(e *hile translocating during separation.
3n instantaneous desire to immediately mo(e is necessary.
Forgetting to first shut a door completely *hen using
translocation through a doorJ other*ise" there *ill be contact *ith
*hat is already behind it.
sing a translocation techni4ue to go through a *all *ithout
!no*ing ho* to pass through solid ob'ects.
Paying too much attention to the process of translocation through
a *allJ this leads to being trapped in the *all.
Forgetting to shut the eyes *hile translocating di(ing headfirst.
The eyes should remain closed until after the techni4ue is complete.
+nsufficient internal association *ith an animate ob'ect *hile
finding it by calling its name.
Trying to find an ob'ect (ia interrogation instead of passi(ely
communicating *ith li(ing ob'ects of the phase.
sing distant corners *hen applying the techni4ue of finding an
ob'ect around the corner. .hoose nearby corners to a(oid *asting
precious tra(el time.
3pplying transmutation techni4ues *ithout possessing sufficient
e&perience in managing (#maintaining$) the phase space.
Exercises for Chater 1
=uestions
1. 0hat becomes possible *ith the ability to translocate in the
phase1
-. 0hat becomes possible *ith the ability to find ob'ects in the
phase1
:. 0hat do translocation and finding ob'ects techni4ues ha(e in
common1
<. 0hat is the sole limitation on the possibilities offered by
translocation and finding ob'ects1
=. 8o* may one translocate across (ery short distances1
>. 0hen the flight techni4ue by 'umping out of a *indo* be
attempted1
@. 0hat should be done if translocation and ob'ect finding
techni4ues do not yield the re4uired result1
A. +s it possible to find a person from real life using the
techni4ue of finding ob'ects1
B. 9oes the stability of space decrease in a deep phase1
1C. 0hat are the fundamental components of space and ob'ect
stability1
11. 8o* large is the role of auditory perception in the stability of
space1
1-. 0hat is most important *hile using a teleportation techni4ue1
1:. 0hat does speed of mo(ement depend on during
teleportation1
1<. 6hould a no(ice apply the techni4ue of teleportation *ith
open eyes1
1=. 0hat techni4ue might the translocation *ith closed eyes
techni4ue turn into1
1>. 6hould large or small details be scrutini?ed *hile
translocating by concentration on remote ob'ects1
1@. +s the techni4ue of translocation during separation applied
after separation or *hile beginning to separate1
1A. 0hen applying the techni4ue of translocation through a door/
is it better if the door is open or closed1
1B. 0hy might translocation by passing through a *all fail1
-C. 0hen using translocation by di(ing" is it important to be in a
place *here there is something to stand on1
-1. 0hile applying the techni4ue of rotation" should rotation be
imagined or real1
--. +s it possible to use a translocation techni4ue to attempt
finding ob'ects1
-:. 0hen using the techni4ue of calling by name" *hat should be
done if the name of a desired person in the phase is un!no*n1
-<. 0hile loo!ing for an ob'ect using the method of in4uiry" is it
important to specify that the ob'ect needs to be found #4uic!ly$1
-=. 8o* far bac! must a turn occur *hen the techni4ue of finding
ob'ects by turning is being used1
->. 0ould the corner of a fence be suitable for applying the
techni4ue of finding ob'ects around the corner1
-@. +s it necessary to shut the eyes *hile using the transmutation
techni4ue1
&as$s
1. 9edicate the ne&t three phases to e&periments *ith
translocation techni4ues" using all of them and tra(elling
*here(er you *ant.
-. 3fter e&periencing three phases dedicated to translocation"
select the techni4ues that *or! best for you.
:. 9uring the ne&t phase" tra(el to the Eiffel To*er" to the Moon"
and to the homes of some of your relati(es.
<. 9edicate the ne&t three phases to e&periments *ith the full
range of techni4ues for finding ob'ects" including translocation
techni4ues.
=. 3fter three phases dedicated to finding ob'ects" select the
techni4ues that you are most comfortable *ith.
>. +n the ne&t phase that you e&perience" find your mother" and
then at the same location locate this te&tboo!" a red globe" and a
green rose.
Chater !5 - 6lication
&9E ESSE,CE O2 6PP<IC6&IO,S
2O: P96SE S&6&ES
Phase perception initially causes so much emotion and (ariety of
e&perience that the practitioner is often not concerned *ith the
4uestion of ho* the phase might be purposefully used. The critical
4uestion of application becomes e(en more critical as e&perience
increases. 3pplication of the phase becomes more (i(id against the
bac!ground of understanding ho* the phenomenon can pro(ide a
means of gaining information and ne* e&periences.
6ome approach the phase practice *ith a predetermined goal"
uninterested in anything else. 0ith a specific goal" a problem may
arise in the origination of the goal because the phase phenomenon is
*rapped in a thic! layer of pre'udices and stereotypes" *hich often
ha(e no bearing on the reality. The primary purpose of this chapter is
to precisely separate reality from fiction. +ts second purpose is to
pro(ide a detailed description of *hat may be obtained from the
practice of phase e&periences.
E(ery pro(en and accessible practical application of the phase is
based on three 4ualities/ a) application founded on the phaseFs ability
to simulate any ob'ect and any space *ith any properties and
functionsJ b) application based on the opportunity to connect *ith the
subconscious mind in order to obtain informationJ c) application
based on the phaseFs ability to impact a practitionerFs physiology.
Most importantly" nothing described in this chapter is difficult to
achie(e. 3ny application may be achie(ed during the (ery first phase
if a practitioner manages to focus and apply the appropriate
techni4ues for translocation or finding ob'ects. Regardless of *hether
the practitioner adheres to a mystical or pragmatic *orld(ie*" a full
range of access is inherently possible.
Possible applications of the phenomenon certainly e&ceed the
scope of descriptions related through this chapter. +t is possible that
other applications simply ha(e not been pro(en yet" and" so far" the
correct methods of practicing these un!no*n. Only the practitioner
may determine the limits of possibility *ithin the phase. Of course"
common sense should be applied" or it *ould be logically and
psychologically difficult to disengage misconceptions. The goal of
this chapter is to provide a real Bthough $ini$al) foundation that is
fir$ and unyielding, &hatever the circu$stance( -f the practitioner
follo&s a strict approach to practice, it &ill "e $uch $ore difficult to
"eco$e lost during further practical and theoretical studies(
6PP<IC6&IO,S B6SE) O, SI-U<6&IO,
Many *onder about the nature of the phase state in relation to the
brain" i.e. *hether or not the phase is all in oneFs head. 7ut in the
conte&t of applying the phase" this is not a (alid concern. Perception
of the entire physical en(ironment is performed through sensory
organs. +n the phase" perception is the same" sometimes e(en more
realistic. 0hether e(erything described in this chapter occurs in
reality or is merely simulated ma!es no difference in terms of the
encountered sensations.
&ra?elling
%round the &orld' +t is possible to reach any point of the
planet" and it is particularly interesting to re(isit places *here the
practitioner once li(ed or (isited" and (isit places that the practitioner
has a strong desire to (isit. E(ery sight and beauty of the Earth
become accessible" be it the Eiffel To*er or an island in Oceania" the
Pyramids of Egypt" or 3ngel Falls.
Through Outer Space/ 3lthough human!ind is not going to
reach Mars any time soon" any practitioner may stand on its surface
and e&perience its uni4ue landscape through the use of translocation
in the phase. There is nothing more ama?ing than obser(ing gala&ies
and nebulae" planets" and stars from the (antage pint of (ast space. Of
all phase applications a(ailable" this one pro(ides practitioners *ith
the most stri!ing aesthetic e&periences.
To different places in ti$e' This ma!es it possible to (isit a
childhood" to see *hat a person *ill loo! li!e in the futureJ a
pregnant *oman in the phase may see *hat her child *ill loo! li!e.
Tra(el far bac! in time and *itness the construction of the Pyramids
at 5i?a" see Paris in the 1@th century" *ander among the dinosaurs of
the Eurassic period.
Through different &orlds' Tra(el a *orld that has been
described in literature or 'ust in(ented by the practitioner" de(eloped
in the imagination. These could be e&traterrestrial ci(ili?ations"
parallel *orlds" or uni(erses from fairy tales and films. 3ny
destination is nearby.
Encounters
5ith relatives' 6ince relati(es cannot al*ays see each other"
there is the remar!able possibility to meet each other and tal! in the
phase. Of course" this does not entail mutual presence. +t is enough
for one person to possess the re4uired desire % the second person may
ne(er e(en !no*. Reali?ing the desire to contact a close relati(e and
e&change information is a treasure.
5ith ac4uaintances' .ircumstances often pre(ent seeing
people *ho are important. This is an opportunity to reali?e a desire
and finally meet that certain person again.
5ith the dead' Regardless of the nature of the phase
phenomenon" nothing else yields the possibility to see" tal! to" and
embrace a deceased lo(ed one. These are (i(id" personal e&periences"
accessible to e(eryone" and achie(ing these encounters does not
re4uire ma'or difficulty. .ourage is the only necessity. From a
techni4ue%related point of (ie*" a stable phase and application of the
finding ob'ects techni4ue sets the stage for *hat at first may seem
impossible. +t should be noted that *hen a deceased person is
encountered in the phase" the distortions caused by the ob'ect finding
techni4ue may lead to some (ery undesirable occurrences. +f you are
interested in this sub'ect" you should carefully study the guideboo!
:ontact &ith the 3eceased (author/ Michael Raduga).
5ith cele"rities' Through the use of ob'ect finding
techni4ues" a practitioner has the opportunity to meet any famous
person. This could be a historical persona" a contemporary politician"
or an artist. +n the phase state" they are all accessible for any type of
interaction. For e&ample" a practitioner could meet Eulius .aesar"
Eesus .hrist" )apoleon" .hurchill" 6talin" 8itler" El(is Presley"
Marilyn Monroe" and a great many others.
:ealiHing )esires
E(eryone has dreams. Regardless of *hether they e(er come
true in reality" they may at least en'oy be reali?ed in the phase. 6ome
dream of a (isit to 2as ;egas" some to dri(e a Ferrari" some (isit
Outer 6pace" others *ould li!e to bathe in a pile of money" and some
desire se&ual e&periences. 3ll of these may finally be e&perienced in
the phase.
6lternati?e to the @irtual World
+n the phase" young men may participate in game battles as if
the battles are real. 3 practitioner can (isit unusual *orlds and places
*hile en'oying completely realistic sensations" feel a *eapon in his
hands" and e(en the smell of gunpo*der. +f desired" e(en the
sensation of battle *ounds may be e&perienced. 5aming possibilities
in the phase are not limited by the po*er of a microprocessor" but the
e&tent of a practitionerFs imagination.
Creati?e )e?eloment
:reating &or+s of art' sing the methods of ob'ect finding or
translocation" an artistic practitioner can purposefully see! an ob'ect
in the phase that may be composed in real life. +f necessary" it is
possible to easily return to study an ob'ect in the phase. For e&ample"
a painter may find a stunning landscape and puts it to can(as in the
real *orld *hile periodically returning to the same landscape in the
phase.
Fie&ing future co$pleted &or+s of art' +f an artist is in the
process of reali?ing an idea" then a preliminarily loo! at the end result
of a design may be seen in the phase. 3 painter can e&amine a
painting in ad(anceJ a sculptor may see a completed sculpture" and an
architect *ill be able to *ander through a house that is still in the
early stages of design. 3ny creati(e *or! can be simulated in the
phase.
% source of inspiration and fantasy' The phase practice
imparts ideas and desires that positi(ely affect creati(e endea(ors.
Furthermore" the reali?ation of desires and tra(els through unusual
spaces e(o!e great emotions" *hich pro(ide e&cellent inspiration.
6PP<IC6&IO,S B6SE) O, CO,&6C&
WI&9 &9E SUBCO,SCIOUS -I,)
3ssume that the phase state is 'ust an e&ceptionally unusual state
of brain and that perception *ithin it is no more than an unusually
realistic play of its functions. 3ssume that a practitioner in the phase
decides to tra(el to a forest. To do so" the translocation *ith closed
eyes techni4ue is used" and" as a result" a forest appears.
0hat happens if the (ision contains (ery detailed !no*ledge of
forests" *hat forests consist of" and *here forests originate1 The
brain creates a hyper%realistic space superior to that of e(eryday
reality" consisting of millions of blades of grass" lea(es" hundreds of
trees" and a multitude of sounds. Each blade of grass has depth and
build" not 'ust a point. Each leaf also consists of component parts. 3
uni4ue" natural pattern ma!es up the bar! of each tree.
6uddenly" a *ind begins to blo* through the forest" and millions
of lea(es and blades of grass" follo*ing a mathematical model of the
propagation of air masses" begin oscillating in a *a(eli!e fashion.
Thus" a certain resource inside us is capable in mere seconds not only
of creating millions of details in the desired scene" but also to control
each of those details indi(iduallyH
E(en if the phase is 'ust a state of mind" this does not mean that
there are no sources of information *ithin it. The mind possesses
great computing ability and is e4uipped to imagine the full e&tent of
the impossible. )o computer" ho*e(er po*erful" is capable of similar
feats. 3 practitioner is able to someho* tap into ama?ing resources
*hile in the phase. +t only remains to learn e&actly ho* to achie(e
mastery.
+t is possible that the phase space is go(erned by the subconscious
mind. This means that the practitioner is able to contact the
subconscious *hile in the phase state. 9uring e(eryday life" the
subconscious mind sends information based on calculations
determined by enormous capabilities. 8o*e(er" humans neither hear
nor percei(e these signals because people are accustomed to
recei(ing information linguistically. The subconscious mind hardly
operates *ithin the limitations of language. .ommunication *ith the
subconscious mind on a conscious le(el is only possible *ithin the
phase. +f all phase ob'ects are created and controlled by the
subconscious mind" then it is possible to use them as translators. For
e&ample" *hen tal!ing to a person in the phase" normal *ords are
heard *hile the ob'ect and communicated information is controlled
by the subconscious mind.
3n e&planation of ho* information is obtained in the phase can
hardly be une4ui(ocally pro(en. Perhaps there are other undisco(ered
resources. 7ut that is not so important. The most important thing is
definitely !no*n/ ho* to obtain information in the phase.
The algorithm for obtaining information from the phase is not
comple&. 3fter entering the phase" only the techni4ues for obtaining
information and the methods of (erifying it need to be learned to
increase in !no*ledge gleaned from the phase.
7ased on the pragmatic e&planation of the nature of the phase as
an unusual state of brain controlled by the subconscious" it may be
assumed that the amount of information obtained in the phase is
limited. +f the phase e&ists *ithin the confines of the brain" then the
brain can only operate on data that has been recei(ed by the brain
o(er the course of its e&istence. +ndeed" it appears that e(erything
percei(ed through the sensory organs is remembered and correlated
*ith other dataJ this obser(ation concern conscious and unconscious
perception.
+f any e(ent is actually a conse4uence of other e(ents" *hich
*ere" in turn" also conse4uences of pre(ious happenings" then
nothing occurs by chance. The initial data is !no*n % then it is
possible to calculate *hat is implied by it.
3s a result" if e(erything is based solely on the resource of the
subconscious mind" then information may be obtained about
e(erything that is related to an indi(idual life/ the practitionerFs
e&periences and the e&periences of those *ith *hom the practitioner
e&periences life. 2essons are learned from the future and past" and the
future and past of others. 3ll in all" in order to approach !no*ing the
*hole of the information a(ailable in the phase" personal !no*ledge
capacity *ould need to increase by 1CC or e(en 1"CCC times.
The only information that is not a(ailable in the phase is that
about *hich the subconscious mind does not ha(e any preliminary
information. For e&ample" *here to purchase a *inning lottery tic!et
that *ill *in millions of dollars cannot be learned since there is no
data that could support the necessary calculation. The subconscious
mind *ill also not be able to sho* the practitioner *hat a random
street in a small to*n on the other end of the Earth loo!s li!e. 3
practitioner should not try guessing *hat information the
subconscious mind has to offer and *hat it doesnFt because mista!es
are easily made. For e&ample" if a practitioner has ne(er been to Paris
and ne(er seen the Eiffel To*er" it might be assumed that the
practitionerFs subconscious mind !no*s nothing about it either"
although through o(er the course of life" the mind has already
recei(ed an enormous 4uantity of information from pictures"
photographs" stories" (ideos" boo!s" and so forth.
There are three basic techni4ues for obtaining information in the
phase. Each of them has its ad(antages and disad(antages that must
be studied and learned before use.
6nimate O34ects &echni'ue.
To perform this method of obtaining information" the practitioner"
in a full deep phase" must locate a person by techni4ues for finding
ob'ects and procure the necessary information from that person
through the use of simple 4uestions. +f the re4uired information is
lin!ed to a certain person" then that person should be located in the
phase. +f the information is not related to anyone in particular" then it
is possible to create a uni(ersal information source" *hich must be
associated *ith *isdom and !no*ledge. For e&ample" this could be a
*ise recluse" a *ell%!no*n philosopher" or a guru.
The ad(antage of this techni4ue is that it is easy to pose additional
4uestions and it is also easier to (erify *hate(er information is
obtained. 3 dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that" for many" it is difficult
to communicate *ith li(ing ob'ects in the phase because of ob'ectsF
unresponsi(eness or a practitionerFs problems *ith maintaining the
phase *hile tal!ing *ith ob'ects.
Inanimate O34ects &echni'ue.
se techni4ues for finding ob'ects in order to locate information
from sources li!e inscriptions" boo!s" or ne*spapers. 0hile trying to
locate the source of information" remember to concentrate of a belief
that *hat is found *ill ha(e the desired information. 6ource types are
not limited to paper mediaJ e(en radios or tele(isions may be
*atched or listened to" and computer search engines and file systems
also may produce results.
3 huge dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that considerable
complications arise if an additional or a follo*%up 4uestion emerges"
*hich may cause the practitioner to ha(e to stop and repeat the
searching process.
The upside to this techni4ue is that if a practitioner has problems
communicating *ith animate ob'ects" this techni4ue can temporarily
ser(e as a reasonable alternati(e.
Eisode &echni'ue.
+n order to recei(e information using this method" imagine an
e(ent or series of e(ents that *ill communicate the desired
information. Then" mo(e to the area *here predetermined e(ents are
e&pected to ta!e place by using translocation techni4ues. 3fter
arri(ing at the destination" use (isual obser(ation to understand *hat
is ta!ing place and the information that the e(ents are
communicating. The episode techni4ue is suitable only for cases
*here information can be obtained by obser(ation.

0o& to verify the infor$ationG The techni4ues for recei(ing
information in the phase are not comple& in and pro(e successful
after 'ust a fe* attempts. 8o*e(er" as *as already mentioned earlier"
the properties of phase spaces that do not fall under the category of
(i(id perception are not particularly stable % not only in terms of
appearance" but also in terms of their properties. .orrectness of
information also depends on the ob'ects themsel(es. The problem
rests in that the practitioner may not be able to properly control the
ob'ect in 4uestion and may recei(e false information.
Interesting fact!
The phase space is not everyday reality@ therefore,
it should not "e treated &ith the nor$al "elief that
every o"servation should "e regarded as fact(
E(en *hen a practitioner has learned to find animate and
inanimate ob'ects *ith an absence of doubt" there is still no guarantee
that the recei(ed information is al*ays accurate. 3 fe* techni4ue%
related tric!s are able to test an ob'ectFs ability to spea! the truth.
For e&ample" an ob'ect can tal! about something *ith absolute
confidence" but that does not mean that *hat it communicates is all
true. +f doubt is e&perienced *hile finding the ob'ect" then doubt may
ha(e an effect on *hat the ob'ect says. This is *hy doubt must be
a(oided at all costs % although beginners are bound to initially ha(e
problems *ith this.
To determine *hether an ob'ect is able to gi(e accurate
information" a control 4uestion should be as!edJ a 4uestion that the
subconscious mind cannot !no* the ans*er to. For e&ample" a
practitioner might as! a found ob'ect/ #0here can + buy the *inning
lottery tic!et for the Mega 7all 'ac!pot1$ +f the ob'ect starts
ans*ering such 4uestions seriously" going into great detail" then the
ob'ect should be created ane* since its properties allo* the
possibility that it *ill lie. 3 proper ob'ect *ill remain silent or say
that it does not !no* the ans*er to the control 4uestion.
3fter accurate information is obtained through the use of a control
4uestion" it must be confirmed. This is done by means of a clarifying
4uestion. The practitioner needs to as! the ob'ect *here the
information came from to find out the details that offer proof of the
informationFs authenticity in the real *orld. The ob'ect may also be
as!ed the same 4uestions more than once" pro(ided they are
re*orded. The ans*ers to re*orded 4uestions must be identical.
Remember" the more important the nature of the information and
the more serious action it implies" the more effort needs to be
in(ested in (erifying it in the real *orld since a certain percentage of
the information is bound to be incorrect despite correct performance
of information%related techni4ues.
6PP<IC6&IO, B6SE)
O, I,2<UE,CI,# P9YSIO<O#Y
There are three main elements that" *ith the help of the phase"
may influence the physiology in (ery beneficial *ays. First" it is
possible to contact the subconscious mind to learn ho* to influence
physiology. 6econd" the brain reacts more strongly to sensations than
to real e(ents. For e&ample" if running *hile in the phase" the
physical processes of the body *ould be consistent *ith the
processes occurring in the body of a person running in reality/
respiration accelerates" blood pressure increases" the heartbeat
4uic!ens" and e(en blood flo* to the feet becomes greater. Third"
*hile the practitioner e&periences profound changes of consciousness
in the phase" this is *hen all direct and indirect forms of
autosuggestion are most effecti(e.
)ot all influences on physiology are 1CCK effecti(e. 8o*e(er"
e(en *ithout a guaranteed rate of success" the effort to influence
physiology is *orthy of attention because ama?ing results can be
obtained. 3l*ays remember that achie(ing a good result may re4uire
repeated influence from the phase. E(en in the physical *orld"
medications re4uire repeated ingestion.
+f the goal is to cure a disease" do not rely solely on the phase.
6ic! persons must use the phase alongside treatment from physicians.
The more serious the illness" the more strongly this rule applies.
O3taining Information
The diagnosis of health problems may be performed *ith the
same techni4ues used for obtaining information. +t is also possible to
learn methods to cure health problems" if such methods e&ist. 7oth of
these possibilities apply to third parties being helped by efforts in the
phase. +nformation gathering is the only pro(en *ay to influence the
physiology of other people by using the phase. For e&ample" it is
possible to find a *ell%!no*n healer in the phase and as! about
personal health problems or the problems of a friend or family
member. 3 clarified ans*er may be used in the assistance of
traditional medical treatment.
6ttention from )octors
Find a doctor in the phase by using the techni4ue of finding
ob'ects and as! the doctor to ta!e e&amine or treat a !no*n illness or
other health problem. For e&ample" in case of abdominal pains the
doctor may palpate the belly" apply pressure to (arious points" and
perform a special massage. 3ny actions are possible" including an
operation. 3fter lea(ing the phase" the practitioner *ill feel a positi(e
result.
&a$ing medicines
The placebo effect is much stronger in the phase than in reality
since all actions occur in a highly modified state of consciousness
and are percei(ed directly. Ob'ect locating techni4ues may be used to
find medications used to treat e&isting problems. +t is also possible to
create self%made substances to produce the desirable effect. For
e&ample" in case of an acute headache in reality" a practitioner may
ta!e a pain!iller *hile in the phase and its effect *ill be partially felt
in the *a!eful state.
)irect Effect
3n illness or problem may be directly affected by actions in the
phase. For e&ample" a sore throat may be *armed by en(isioning a
burning sensation in the throat or by mo(ing to a hot location" li!e a
sauna. +f a practitioner *ould li!e to increase physical fle&ibility" then
stretching in the phase *ill cause the body to ad'ust to the
none&istent action by rela&ing and tensing the corresponding tendons
and muscles.
Programming
This is nothing more than normal autosuggestion or auto%training
in the phase" *hich is more potent in the phase than reality. 3
practitioner should repeat a desired goal silently or aloud and" if
possible" should imagine e&periencing the desired result. For
e&ample" if the aim is to get rid of depression" a practitioner should
attempt to recreate a happy mood in the phase" e&periencing it to the
fullest e&tent possible. 6imultaneously" silent repetition of a goal *ith
complete understanding and e&pectation that e(erything *ill be
alright" that e(erything is *onderful *ill undoubtedly produce the
desired effect.
Useful exeriences
E(erything *ith useful properties in reality should be e&perienced
as useful in the phase since the body *ill react in practically the same
manner. seful e&periences may include e&ercising" going to the
gym" ha(ing a massage" ta!ing mud or salt baths" and e&periencing
pleasant emotions.
Psychology
Practicing phase%related techni4ues fa(orably affects the
psychology because it offers ne* opportunities and e(o!es ne*
emotions. 8o*e(er" there are specific applications of the phase that
produce differing psychological effects. For e&ample" it is possible to
use the phase space as a bridge for dealing *ith phobias by
facilitating a setting *here a practitioner may confront and deal *ith
certain fears. ;arious comple&es may be defeated in a similar manner.
The use of a *ell%!no*n techni4ue called re%(isiting (recapitulation)"
*here a person re%e&periences ad(erse e(ents *hile trying to relate to
them in a ne* *ay" has been used successfully in the phase.
&raining
3ny motor s!ills can be sharpened by using it in reality and in the
phase because the algorithm of rapid physical action is generated at
the le(el of interaction bet*een areas of the brain that correspond to
muscle action. +n the phase" *restlers may practice thro*s" !arate
fighters may practice punches and !ic!s" and gymnasts may practice
acrobatics. 8a(ing enough time to practice these actions in the phase
is another matter.
U,P:O@E, E22EC&S
People often approach the practice of (arious phase states *ith
deep%rooted misconceptions about *hat can actually be achie(ed
through practice. E(erything listed in this section refers to these
misconceptions. +t has not been pro(en that any of these things is
impossibleJ ho*e(er" actions should be based on pro(en and (erified
methods in order to a(oid ma!ing mista!es and *asting time.
Ehysical e#it' +f the first e&perience *ith the phase phenomenon
happens by accident" it is almost impossible not to interpret it as a
real separation of the soul from the body I a physical e&it. This is
ho* the initial phase e&perience really feels. 0ith e&perience it
becomes easily noticeable that certain things in reality do not match
things in the phase" li!e the placement of ob'ects or furniture in the
house *here a phase is first encountered.
)o actual physical e&it from the body has e(er been pro(en
through scientific e&perimentation and obser(ation. For e&ample" in
the phase" it is not possible to fly around to locations in physical
*orld" although it may seem so" the locations that are e&perienced are
produced *ithin the mind. )or is it possible to pinch someone in the
phase and then to find a bruise on the person *hile in reality.
Other &orlds' The phase space is similar to the physical *orld"
and a practitioner may be inclined to thin! that the soul has left the
body. 6ometimes the phase ta!es on an absolutely unnatural form. 3s
a result" the practitioner may decide that a parallel *orld has been
entered/ the *orld beyond" the astral plane" mental space" or the ether.
3lthough tra(el in the phase can lead to many places" this does not
mean that the phase allo*s tra(el through or use of actual" alternate
*orlds. The practitioner should be reasonable.
3evelop$ent of super-a"ilities' +t is partially correct to consider
the practice of the phase as an e&trasensory ability since it is an actual
de(elopment of e&tremely unusual s!ills that ha(e al*ays been
considered mystical. Times ha(e changed" and the phase should
hardly be shuttled off to the esoteric" obscure corners of !no*ledge.
There e&ists an unpro(en theory that the practice of the phase can
impart unusual abilities. 0hile literature is full of references to this
effect" these abilities ha(e not yet been pro(en by anyone. The same
applies to intentionally de(eloping unusual abilities in the phase. Pes"
these may be trained *hile in the phase" but this does not mean that
training in the phase *ill yield the same results in the real *orld.
Practice should not be for the sa!e of achie(ing super%abilities since
there are many pro(en applications that do translate to reality in
(aluable *ays. 7e realistic.
USE O2 &9E P96SE BY &9E )IS6B<E)
0hile practicing the phase may still be (ie*ed by the ma'ority as
entertainment or an element of self%de(elopment at best" phase
practice ta!es on a *hole ne* meaning for the physically disabled.
For them" the phase may be the only place *here the handicaps of
reality dissol(e and disabled practitioners e&perience a range of
possibility greater than the life e&perienced in reality.
3 blind person *ill see again in the phase" e(en more clearly than
seeing people do in reality. 6omeone *ho is paraly?ed *ill be able
*al!" run" and also fly. 3 deaf person *ill hear the murmur of streams
and the chirping of birds. For the disabled" the phase practice is a
chance to disco(er ne*" incomparable *orlds free of physical
limitation.
)aturally" there are some nuances that must be understood. First"
for e&ample" if a person *as born blind" then there is the 4uestion as
to *hether or not they *ould be able to see in the phase the same *ay
ordinary people see. 8o*e(er" this issue has not been fully studied"
and blind people should simply carry out their o*n independent
research. 6econd" some types of disabilities can negati(ely affect the
practice of the phase states. For e&ample" people *ho ha(e gone
blind ha(e greater difficultly catching the intermediate state bet*een
sleep and *a!efulness since" unli!e seeing people" they may a*a!en
*ithout opening their eyes to the perception of sound. Third" a purely
psychological disability plays an enormous negati(e role.
Psychologically disabled people ha(e a *hole range of specific
beliefs and attitudes that may present an obstacle for them.
0hate(er the indi(idual issues" this particular area of phase
applications re4uires additional study. +t deser(es significant attention
because it is a (alid tool for the rehabilitation of the disabled. +t is
*or!able" uni4ue" and e&tremely surprising in terms of the
e&periences that it offers.
&YPIC6< -IS&6>ES
W9E, USI,# 6PP<IC6&IO,S
3ttempting an applied use of the phase *ithout reaching a good
depth. 9eepening must al*ays be performed before applications are
attempted.
7eing so in(ol(ed in phase applications that #maintaining$
techni4ues are forgotten.
Forgetting to consider ho* to breathe *hen tra(eling through
Outer 6pace or under*ater" *hich may lead to asphy&iation.
.oncentrating on a certain ob'ect *hile tra(eling through time
instead of concentrating on time tra(el" *hich should be the focus
since it is the point of performing the applications.
Forgetting techni4ues for #maintaining$ *hen animate ob'ects are
encountered *hen these techni4ues must al*ays be !ept in mind.
3n inability to o(ercome fear during contact *ith deceased
people. This fear must be o(ercome once and it *ill ne(er resurface
again.
2imiting desires *hile practicing the phase. There is no limit to
desire *ithin the phase.
2imiting the performance of certain actions" although there are no
customary norms of beha(ior in the phase" unless the practitioner
decides upon specific limits.
0hile loo!ing for information in the phase" attempting to obtain
!no*ledge *hich clearly e&ceeds the scope of the subconscious
mind.
3pplying the techni4ue of obtaining information from animate
ob'ects *ithout !no*ing ho* to communicate *ith them.
Forgetting to chec! the ability of an ob'ect to con(ey (alid
!no*ledge. The probability of bad information is much higher if it is
not (erified.
Failing to (erify information in the phase before using it in
reality.
Forgetting to (erify serious information obtained in the phase in
reality before using it. ;erification absolutely must be performed to
a(oid using bad information in reality.
3 single attempt to influence the physiology through the phase. +n
the ma'ority of cases" results are gained through repeated effort.
3n attempt to cure some disease only using the phase" *hereas it
is compulsory to see! medical ad(ice.
+nitially belie(ing that the phase is the e&it of the soul from the
body" *hile this is easily refuted in practice.
.oncentrating only on unpro(en applications" despite all the
e(idence out there that this is most li!ely a *aste of time.
Exercises for Chater !5
=uestions
1. 0hat are the three basic applications of the phase1
-. 3re pro(en practical phase applications accessible to any
practitioner1
:. 0hile in the phase" is it possible to actually tra(el through
3frica1
<. +s it possible to *al! on the moon in the phase1
=. +s it possible" *hile in the phase" to appear at the time of the
EarthFs creation1
>. +n the phase" is it possible to appear in the magical *orld
behind the loo!ing glass1
@. 0hich relati(es can be met in the phase1
A. +s it possible to meet and tal! to your fa(orite actor in the
phase1
B. 0here can one reali?e any cherished dream1
1C. .an a practitioner appear in the computer game 3oo$1
11. .an a musician use the phase for creati(e purposes1
1-. 9oes the practicing the phase influence a personFs
imagination1
1:. 0hat most probably go(erns the phase space1
1<. 0hat !ind of information is obtainable in the phase1
1=. 0hile in the phase" is it possible to find out *here the lost !ey
to an apartment is located1
1>. 0hat !ind of people can disco(er *here treasure is hidden in
the phase1
1@. 6hould any information obtained in the phase be construed as
accurate1
1A. 6hould information obtained in the phase be (erified after
*a!ing up" e(en if itFs already (erified in the phase1
1B. 6hould obtaining information occur before deepening has
been performed1
-C. To obtain information *hile using the animate ob'ects
techni4ue" *ho should be tal!ed to if the goal is it to find out the
thoughts of a boss at *or!1
-1. 8o* might information from an animate ob'ect be obtained1
--. .an an inscription on a *all be used as an inanimate source of
information1
-:. +s it possible to use the episode techni4ue to learn *here one
has lost the !ey to oneFs apartment1
-<. 6hould a doctor be consulted before trying to cure a disease
through phase practice1
-=. 3re results from influencing physiology in the phase al*ays
1CCK guaranteed1
->. 0hat phase techni4ues might be used to influence the bodies
of other people1
-@. +s it possible to obtain information that can be used to
influence the body and its functions1
-A. +s it possible to ta!e a *ell%!no*n pain!iller in the phase and
feel its effects on e&it1
-B. +s it possible to use autosuggestion in the phase1
:C. .an athletes use the phase to de(elop their s!ills1
:1. +s it realistic to e&pect to the soul *ill e&it the body *hile
practicing the phase1
:-. +s it possible to enter a parallel uni(erse through the phase1
::. 6hould a practitioner hope to de(elop super%abilities in the
phase1
&as$s
1. ;isit the Pyramids of 5i?a in the phase. Meet your fa(orite
singer and tra(el to your dream house.
-. 0hile in the phase" find a *ise person *ho is an authority on
matters of the phase and learn from them *hat entrance
techni4ues *ill best suit your practice.
:. Try to percei(e heat throughout the entire body by
translocation to a sauna or through auto%suggestion.
<. 2earn to mo(e ob'ects by simply staring at them in the phase"
and appreciate the e&tent to *hich this s!ill is reflected in reality.
Part III
6uxiliary Information
Chater !! " Useful &is
6 P:6#-6&IC 6PP:O6C9
The only sure *ay to get practice *ithout unnecessarily *asting
time is to ha(e a pragmatic and rational approach to the nature and
possibilities of the phase phenomenon.
The ma'ority of a(ailable information regarding dissociati(e
phenomena is inaccurate. This becomes ob(ious during initial entries
into the phase. This is *hy practice should begin from the perspecti(e
of a clean slate" using a logical bearing in thin!ing/ everything not
confir$ed "y personal e#perience should "e ta+en &ith a grain of
salt( This means only personal e&perience should be ta!en seriously"
not the e&perience of ac4uaintances" authors" teachers" blogs" or
forums.
To err is humanJ thus" it is also human to pass on errors. 3s a
result" many parado&ical old *i(esF tales concerning the phase
phenomenon ha(e become accepted a priori.
)ot e(erything *ritten in esoteric literature should be thro*n out.
6ome things may possibly be dra*n from it. 3fter reading such
literature" a practitioner should not assume that the ne* !no*ledge is
a uni(ersal truth.
For a house to stand firm" it needs a solid foundation. The only
*ay to build a good foundation phase practice is to approach the
phenomenon in a do*n%to%earth manner" from a scientific
perspecti(e" discounting any purported supernatural phenomena.
Once a solid foundation has been established" e(eryone has the right
to build their o*n truth on it.
I,)EPE,)E,& 6,6<YSIS
+f a practitioner is only interested in ha(ing phase e&periences"
then the simple treatment of this guideboo! and other materials may
suffice. 8o*e(er" if a practitioner *ants to achie(e the best results"
ample focus must be gi(en to indi(idual thought and formation of
opinion based on personal analysis.
ntil all 4uestions are ans*ered through a search for ans*ers in
(arious sources of information" no real progress should be e&pected.
Many things cannot be described or e&plained. The resolution of
many issues *ill al*ays remain up to indi(idual 'udgment and
understanding. Finding all of the ans*ers is impossible. Moreo(er"
trying to possess all of the ans*ers is a serious inhibitor to real
progress because the practitioner *ould ha(e to digress into dubious
literature and con(ersation aside from real" formati(e practice.
The ad(ice and e&periences of others may lead to error. +n no case
should there be any authorities or unachie(able ideals. 3 logical" e(en
s!eptical approach should be ta!en during research and practice. The
goal of this guideboo! is to pro(ide the reader *ith linear" factual
information sufficient for the de(elopment of independent analysis.
Each time a practitioner encounters some incomprehensible
phenomenon or problem *hen performing phase techni4ues" an
independent analysis of the phenomenon should be formed before
loo!ing else*here for the cause. +f a see!er loo!s for ans*ers outside
of personal reasoning" there is a high ris! of assimilating and acting
upon a fallacy.
Many practitioners are not *illing to analy?e personal successes
and failures" and instead search all sorts of boo!s" *hich often
contradict one another" and using a hodge%podge of e&traneous"
un(erified information can only lead one to further" and 4uite
infectious" fallacy.
6PP:O6C9 &O <I&E:6&U:E
2iterature of e(ery sort has al*ays been the main (ehicle for
disseminating information about the phase state. The phase
phenomenon is referred to by other terms/ astral pro'ection" out%of%
body tra(el" or lucid dreaming. +n addition to disseminating
information" many boo!s are often (ehicles for disseminating
fallacies.
This is easy to recogni?e *hen researching se(eral such boo!s
and comparing described e(ents and theories. The information is
more often than not contradictory and based on opinions that ha(e
ne(er been (erified by anyone" including the authors. The result is a
mass of speculation that has no bearing on reality" nearly al*ays
accompanied by a false certainty about the sub'ect matter. 8o*e(er"
unli!e the real *orld" the phase is not a place *here one can belie(e
oneFs eyes or feelings. The phasesF appearance and 4ualities depend
(ery much on the person e&periencing it.
For e&ample" if a practitioner belie(es upon entering the phase the
body *ill be lying nearby on the bed" then it *ill al*ays be there. +f a
practitioner belie(es that the percei(ed body should al*ays be
tethered to the physical body" then in the practitioner *ill al*ays see
and e(en feel a tether in the phase. This is a simple case of
e&pectations becoming reality. 6imilarly" someone *ho has entered
the phase by accident and thin!s that the time of death has arri(ed
may see angels and a tunnel *ith a light at the end. +f someone is
e&tremely religious" there may be a perception that something holy"
e(en 5od" has appeared. +f entry to the phase is construed as a result
of being abducted by aliens" then that is e&actly *hat *ill happen.
This *ould all be 4uite funny if it *ere not actually encountered.
0hen it occurs" the only thing left to do is to belie(e. To belie(e" to
tell others about it" and *rite boo!s about it...
There are authors *ho impart no illusions" but it is often difficult
for a no(ice to separate the truth from illusion or open fabrication"
*hich is *hy a s!eptical approach to the contents of any boo! is
*arranted. The only truth con(eyed in any boo! is that *hich has
been (erified by personal e&perience. The rest should simply be
noted and possibly ta!en into consideration.
+n conclusion" boo!s should be studied to disco(er techni4ue%
related information that allo*s a practitioner to enter the phase and
control the e&perience. This is the only point of intersection among
all beliefs and theories.
P:6C&ICE E,@I:O,-E,&
6ince techni4ues used to enter the phase are associated *ith a
specific type of mental operation" it is necessary to create
comfortable conditions so that e&ternal distracters are !ept to a
minimum. 3 room should neither be too cold or too hot" nor too
bright. Performing techni4ues at a comfortable temperature in a
dar!ened room or *hile *earing a sleeping mas! are *ays to
promote unhindered practice.
+nterfering noises are often also ma'or distracters and isolation
from such noises is necessary to successful practice. +t is often
sufficient to turn off the phone and close doors and *indo*s. +f this
does not help" or if it is e&tremely loud outside the *indo*" one can
use standard earmuffs.
+t is also helpful to gi(e ad(ance notice to people so that they are
not alarmed. +t is also preferable that no one is in the bed *ith the
practitioner. Most often" domestic animals interfere *ith the
performance of techni4ues" *hich is *hy they should be fed
beforehand and !ept out of the room *here direct or indirect
techni4ues are practiced.
&6<>I,# WI&9 <I>E--I,)E) PEOP<E
5reat benefit is deri(ed by discussing personal e&periences *ith
other practitioners. This leads to an e&change of information" ne*
!no*ledge" and mutual help concerning certain problems and issues.
The greatest effect comes through communication in person" and
not solely through mail" forums" and blogs. Meeting face%to%face *ith
li!e%minded people promotes camaraderie and a useful
!no*ledgebase to consider during indi(idual practice.
9ue to the fact that !no*ledge of the phenomenon is
underde(eloped" difficulties may arise in finding someone to tal! to.
This can be sol(ed by personally sharing phase e&periences *ith
friends and family members" regardless of *hether they are fello*
practitioners. +t is e(en better to pass on training literature" li!e this
guideboo!.
The *ebsite www.obe4u.com also has a discussion forum de(oted
to the phase" ma!ing it possible to obtain and e&change a large
amount of information. The site also has the contact information for
the coordinators of Phase Practitioner .lubs all around the *orld"
*hich is a non%commercial association of enthusiasts *ho meet to
e&change and discuss e&periences.

&9E :I#9& W6Y &O >EEP 6 GOU:,6<
Deeping a 'ournal can be of much help *hile learning and
practicing the phase. 0hen properly !ept" a 'ournal can help a
practitioner to de(elop an analysis that *ill increase the 4uality of
phase e&periences. 7y and large" !eeping a 'ournal helps to iron out a
sporadic practice" turning it into a structured discipline that can be
mastered.
3n effecti(e diary should contain a massi(e amount of indicators
that allo* a statistical study to unco(er patterns. +t is essential that
each entry include the date" time of day or night" a detailed account of
entries into the phase and phase e&periences. 9escriptions of
mista!es and a plan of action for the ne&t phase should also be
recorded. 9uring the no(ice stages of practice" e(en noting
unsuccessful entry attempts is beneficial. 2ater on" only successful
phase e&periences may be recorded.

8ere is an e&ample of a proper 'ournal entry/
)ataD
2#perience /o( 12
January 6
th
, 2H
2'88 EM
ExerienceD
- &o+e up early in the $orning( %fter e#ercising, - too+ a
sho&er and ate "rea+fast( - &atched TF and read "oo+s until
lunch(
- laid do&n for a nap at 1 EM, right after lunch( - felt li+e
perfor$ing indirect techni4ues, and affir$ed this intention( -
&o+e up the first ti$e to $ove$ent, "ut after trying to e$ploy
forced falling asleep Bin order to negate the effects of the
$ove$ent), - fell asleep( - &o+e up the second ti$e &ithout
$ove$ent and tried to roll out( This didn.t &or+ and - tried
levitating and getting up( %fter that, - $oved on to phanto$
&iggling( Move$ent occurred in $y right hand( %fter doing
this for several seconds, - decided to try listening in( Sounds
started, "ut - &as una"le to $a+e the$ louder( 0o&ever,
i$ages appeared "efore $y eyes and - started to vie& the$(
%fter they "eca$e realistic, - decided to try rolling out and it
&or+ed &ithout a hitch(
My vision &as di$, as if through a veil( But then, the rest
of the sensations - felt reached the verge of reality( This is
&hen - &ent to the &indo&( For so$e reason, it &as su$$er
outside, and not &inter( There &as a red fire-truc+ outside the
&indo&( There &ere really lo& clouds in the s+y( The sun &as
a"ove the$(
/e#t, everything 4uic+ly faded a&ay and - found $yself
"ac+ in $y "ody( Then, - got up and loo+ed at the ti$e( -t &as
2'16 EM(
-ista$esD
1( 5hen the phanto$ &iggling &or+ed, - should have
aggressively tried to increase the range of $ove$ent, and not
si$ply done &iggling, let alone change to another techni4ue(
%fter all, if &iggling occurs, the phase can al&ays "e entered(
2( The sa$e &ith the sounds( - had no great desire to a$plify
sounds or even listen in( 2verything &as done lac+adaisically(
8( - should have started &ith deepening and not actions, as
visual sensations &ere not vivid( I( - should have e$ployed
techni4ues for $aintaining( 6( Jou can.t loo+ do&n for long
&ithout si$ultaneously using techni4ues for $aintaining, yet -
too+ in everything outside the &indo& and in the s+y( K( -
forgot a"out the plan of action( L( - should have tried again to
enter the phase(
Plan of action for next timeD
1( 3efinitely deepen the phase as $uch as possi"le( 2( -
should try to go through a &all( 8( Translocate to $y %untie in
/e& Jor+( I( Translocate to the Statue of Mi"erty and e#a$ine
her cro&n( 6( Try to conduct the e#peri$ent of putting $y
hand into $y head(
Chater !% " Practitioners7 Exeriences
&9E SI#,I2IC6,CE
O2 O&9E: PEOP<E7S EEPE:IE,CES
The ability to analy?e the e&periences of others can be a great
supplement to personal training. This allo*s a practitioner to re(ie*
and thin! through situations that ha(e not yet been personally
encountered. The more a practitioner analyses the e&periences of
other practitioners" fe*er mista!es *ill be made during indi(idual
practice.
Reading the e&periences contained in this section *ill shed much
light on proper phase practice. The actions that these practitioners
too! to achie(e results *ill be subconsciously retained by the readerFs
memory. 2ater" these actions may reproduce similar circumstances in
the phase" affording (aluable opportunities to respond using proper
actions.
3t the beginning stages of practice" many practitioners lac! in real
descriptions of phase e&periences *hile techni4ue%related !no*ledge
abounds. Techni4ues can be conceptuali?ed in many different *ays"
*hile descriptions of their application are much more demonstrati(e.
Thus" many practitioners ha(e no idea about ho* genuine practice
transpires.
The e&periences described in this section are useful % e(en from a
psychological point of (ie*. E(en if a person belie(es that the phase
phenomenon e&ists" it may be construed as e&tremely difficult or
personally impossible. 3fter learning about other peopleFs
e&periences" a person *ill reali?e that these practitioners ha(e been
able to enter the phase *ithout any complicated or incomprehensible
techni4ues. The reader *ill understand that the !ey is to ta!e right
actions at the right moment" trying to master the phase *ith calmness
and confidence.
0hile re(ie*ing and analy?ing other peopleFs e&periences in this
section" the reader should remember that these e&periences are based
on personal beliefs about the phenomenon" *hich is *hy occult
terminology and notions may be encountered. 8o*e(er" such aspects
of the descriptions are not important. Focus should be gi(en to
techni4ue%related actions described in the accounts. The reader
should also ta!e into account that some nuances (li!e e&periential
realism) are not al*ays clear in the te&t and that it is not al*ays
possible to determine *hy certain e(ents occurred in the phase
e&periences described here.
3ll of the follo*ing descriptions belong to real people *ho either
related the accounts orally" *rote them do*n during classes at the
6chool of Out%of%7ody Tra(el" submitted them (ia email" or posted
them on the forum at www.obe4u.com. Though the total number of
recorded" (erifiable phase descriptions e&ceeds one thousand" only
se(eral cases that are illustrati(e and useful for de(eloping analysis
ha(e been selected. Primarily" these are descriptions of the
practitionersF initial phase e&periences" *hich are most rele(ant to
ne* practitioners.
The large number of mista!es made by almost e(ery practitioner"
regardless of their le(el of e&perience" should not be ta!en too
seriously *hile reading the comments. 3ctually" it is a rare occasion
that the phase is e&perienced *ithout any techni4ue%related errors.
E(erybody ma!es mista!es.
E&periments are listed in ascending order of 4uality and number
of properly performed actions. 3ccounts ha(e been published *ith
the permission of the authors.
6,6<YSIS O2 SE<EC&E)
P:6C&I&IO,E:SI EEPE:IE,CES
,o. !
Boris Pronya$in
Coy8riter. >ie?J U$raine
- &o+e up in the >correct? state( - i$$ediately felt vi"rations,
and "efore - had ti$e to ti$e to thin+ a"out anything, - &as +noc+ed
out of $y "ody "y a strong +ic+( - started falling( - had no vision, the
floor &as gone( Mi+e a nose-diving airplane, - &as in a free-fall( -
+ept dropping faster and faster( - started to feel that - &as losing
control( The only thing - could do &as increase the speed &ith &hich
- fell, all of the &ays that occurred to $e to try $aintain the phase
that - atte$pted at that $o$ent only lo&ered $y degree of
a&areness( Touching did not do anything for $e, as - &as 1ust an
une$"odied spirit in a co$plete vacuu$( Fision &as also $issing( -
started to panic due to the i$$inent foul( But the acceleration of the
fall did not help either, and - &as flying and &aiting for the $o$ent
&hen - &ould "e thro&n out into the drea$ &orld( %nd - dropped li+e
this until - fell asleep(
=uestionsD 9id 7oris describe a direct or indirect techni4ue1
0hat could he ha(e done if no spontaneous separation had occurred1
8o* could 7oris ha(e more correctly used deepening techni4ues1
0hy *asnGt 7oris thro*n into a phase episode1 0hy did he fall
asleep1
6ns8ers and CommentsD 3n indirect techni4ue *as employed.
+f spontaneous separation had not occurred" 7oris could ha(e tried to
separate on his o*n. +f an attempt to separate had failed" it *ould be
necessary to implement indirect techni4ues by intensifying the
(ibrations" and then try once again to separate. +n order to deepen
and" mean*hile" reach a destination *hile falling" 7oris should ha(e
applied translocation techni4ues and" upon reaching a location"
continued to deepen by means of sensory amplification. For e&ample"
he could ha(e applied the techni4ue of translocation by teleportation
*ith his eyes closed or simply tried to catch sight of his hands
through the dar!ness" *hich also *ould ha(e induced an e&it.
7oris also did not pay any attention to the roar in his ears. +t could
ha(e been used for the techni4ue of listening in" *hich *ould ha(e
helped him to deepen and maintain. The lac! of a set aim to land
some*here resulted in his endless fall" though it does not al*ays
happen this *ay. 7oris fell asleep due to his passi(ity and also
because he forgot that falling asleep *as a possibility" though he did
remember about the possibility of an inad(ertent return to reality (a
foul).
,o. %
6lexei Ba$hare?
Engineer. SochiJ :ussia
This &as the first ti$e that - $anaged to "eco$e conscious &hile
drea$ing( Before falling asleep, - concentrated on the dar+ness
"efore $y eyes and tried to re$ain consciousness as long as - could(
%ll of a sudden, - drea$t that - &as levitating to the ceiling, &hich
resulted in $y "eco$ing conscious that - &as drea$ing( My phanto$
"ody responded poorly to atte$pts to control it, and si$ply hovered
"eneath the ceiling( There &ere t&o people sitting on the floor "elo&(
They &ere loo+ing in $y direction, "ut it see$ed that they did not see
$e( %t this point - &o+e up and felt so$e sort of tingling and itching
in $y legs(
=uestionsD 0hat factors led to the entry into the phase through
dream consciousness1 0hat needed to be done *hile ho(ering about
beneath the ceiling1 0hy did the foul happen so fast1 0hat should
ha(e been done immediately after returning to the body1
6ns8ers and CommentsD 9ream consciousness occurred due to
the 3le&eiFs intent to concentrate on the space before his eyes and his
desire to remain conscious for as long as possible. The process of
becoming conscious *as caused by the sensation of flying *hile
dreaming. Flying almost al*ays becomes an anchor for dream
consciousness. +mmediately after the phase occurred" 3le&ei should
ha(e started deepening. +nstead" he simply ho(ered about and
obser(ed. 0hile all the mo(ements may ha(e been difficult to
perform" they should ha(e ne(ertheless still been done (ery acti(ely.
3s a result" lightness and a deepening of the phase *ould ha(e
ensued. 8is inad(ertent e&it from the phase happened due to
passi(ity" failure to deepen" and non%compliance *ith the rules for
maintaining the phase. E(en upon returning to his body" 3le&ei
should ha(e tried to separate again.
,o. (
)mitry -ar$o?
:adio -echanic. -osco8J :ussia
My first ti$e &as the $ost terri"le event in $y life( - had never
e#perienced such terror( -t happened in 3ece$"er, 1!!( - &as
falling asleep in $y "ed at ho$e( Suddenly, - heard so$eone enter
$y roo$, "ut - did not pay attention to the >intruder?( Then, t&o
fe$ale hands gra""ed $e fro$ "ehind, and &hile pressing $y "elly,
started to lift $y "ody up( - distinctly felt thin fingers &ith long nails
on $y "elly, "ut &as co$pletely paraly*ed and a"solutely una"le
$ove any part of $y "ody or put up any +ind of resistance( - felt $y
"ody go through the ceiling, "ut then &as pulled still higher and
higher(
- got scared that this could "e death( - &as afraid not so $uch of
death as of the un+no&n( %ll of this happened so s&iftly that - found
$yself unprepared for such a crossover( - started to pray( - as+ed ;od
to help $e free $yself and go "ac+( - panic+ed( - can.t say ho& $any
seconds $y forced levitation lasted or ho& high - &as lifted a"ove $y
house, "ut the $o$ent ca$e &hen - instantly returned to $y "ed(
=uestionsD 0as this entry into the phase deliberate1 0hat !ind of
techni4ue led to the phase1 0hat is the name for the complete
immobili?ation that 9mitry encountered1 0hat should he ha(e done
in order to start mo(ing1 0hy did his body easily go through the
ceiling1 0hy *as he able to stop this terrible e&perience by praying1
0hat could he ha(e done immediately upon returning to his body1
6ns8ers and CommentsD This phase e&perience *as
spontaneous and falls under the category of direct techni4ues since
there *as no significant lapse into sleep. The *hole e&perience *as
accompanied by sleep paralysis" *hich is *hy it *as difficult for
9mitry to do anything. +n order to mo(e in this type of situation" it
*ould ha(e been necessary to intensify the phase state by using an
indirect techni4ue or redouble efforts to mo(e.p
9mitryFs body *ent through the ceiling *ithout any difficulty
because there *as no (ision and the phase itself had not been
deepened" other*ise this *ould not ha(e happened so easily. Praying
and appealing to 5od helped in this case because praying facilitated a
rela&ation of perceptions and an intention to go bac! to reality/ t*o
factors *hich are crucial during emergency return techni4ues. pon
returning to his body" he could ha(e still tried to separate again"
though this *ould ha(e been easier said than done due to the fear
associated *ith the first e&perience.
,o. *
I?an Ya$o?le?
Student. 6nt8erJ Belgium
- don.t +no& &hat &o+e $e up, "ut - +ne& right a&ay that
so$ething &as out of order( - could not open $y eyes, and $y "ody
&as al$ost 1ust as+ing to rise up( - understood &hat &as going on N
all of this indicated that - &as having an out-of-"ody e#perience( The
first thing - tried &as to lift $y left hand up, and it &or+ed( -
understood that this &as an astral hand, "ecause - could see through
it( - $oved hastily and carefully to the other side of the "ed BThere
&as a strange sensation in $y head at that ti$e)( - cal$ed do&n and
tried to do so$ething again( - levitated a"out half a $eter a"ove the
"ed( Fision ca$e "ac+ to $e right then and - sa& &hat appeared to
"e $y roo$, "ut not e#actly it, as the rug on the floor &as of a
different color pattern and the door &as closed for so$e reason( -
could not co$prehend &hy everything &as lit fro$ "ehind $y "ac+(
Then, - loo+ed over $y left shoulder and sa& a s$all "right &hite
"all "ehind $y shoulder "lade at a distance of H inches( -t &as
lighting up the roo$ up( Then - tried to go through the door, "ut &as
una"le to( Out of the fear that - &ould never return to $y real "ody, -
&o+e up in the everyday &orld(
=uestionsD 9uring the beginning of his e&perience" *hat
phenomenon typical to the phase and a*a!ening did +(an encounter1
0hat !ind of techni4ue" direct or indirect" led to the phase1 0hat
specific techni4ues *ere employed1 8o* could the sensation of #the
body 'ust as!ing to rise up$ ha(e been used1 0hat should ha(e been
done immediately *hen he reali?ed that it *as possible to raise his
hand1 0hat should ha(e been the first actions ta!en after le(itation1
0hy *as it unnecessary to immediately try to go through the door1
0hat should ha(e been done *hen +(an returned to his body1 9oes
this practitioner ha(e a do*n%to%earth (ie* or an esoteric (ie* of the
nature of this phenomenon1
6ns8ers and CommentsD pon a*a!ening in a state of sleep
paralysis" +(an understood that he could use this opportunity for the
phase and immediately started attempts to separate *ithout
employing techni4ues for creating the state" as they *ould ha(e been
superfluous. This *as an indirect techni4ue by nature. 8e could ha(e
follo*ed his impulse to le(itate from the (ery beginning instead of
mo(ing his hands. 3fter his hand started to mo(e" he could ha(e
stood up or separated. +nstead" +(an simply rolled o(er and calmed
do*n for an instant" although doing so is strongly discouraged and is
a *aste of the progress made up to this point. Then" after starting to
le(itate" he should ha(e" first of all" assumed a position distinct from
that of his real body" stood up on the floor" and immediately started
deepening. +nstead" he di(erted his attention to the light source and an
attempt to go through the door.
E(en if e(erything had been done correctly from the beginning"
there *ould ha(e been no reason to attempt to go through the door.
+(an could ha(e simply opened it. The s!ill of going through ob'ects
should be learned after first fine%tuning the ability to deepen and
maintain the phase. There *as no reason to return out of fear" but
e(en a return to the body" another immediate attempt at separating
*ould most li!ely ha(e been successful.
The use of the term of #astral hand$ indicates that the practitioner
harbors esoteric (ie*s on the sub'ect.
,o. +
,atalya >oHheno?a
Engineer. Shchel$o?oJ :ussia
5hen - &as a"out 1L or 1H years old, - read so$e esoteric
articles on astral pro1ection( They see$ed 4uite interesting to $e, "ut
no $ore than a curiosity N - did not particularly "elieve in such
things(
One evening, - &ent to "ed as usual( - &o+e up in the $iddle of
the night, "ut &as una"le to $ove $y "ody and there &as a loud
noise in $y head( 0aving "een re$inded of those articles, - si$ply
tried to levitate and - $anaged to do so, as if through $y forehead
so$eho&( The sensation of flying &as very realistic, to $y great
surprise( The first thought that occurred to $e &as, O5o&, these
astral guys &eren.t lying,? - hovered a"ove $y "ody for so$e ti$e in
the dar+( - thought of vision, and it started to appear( - then fle&
to&ards the &indo&, and upon turning around in to face $y "ody, -
sa& it in its proper place( - decided to fly "ac+ to it and touch it(
5hen - finally po+ed it, it suc+ed $y "ac+ into it, causing a 4uite
strange sensation(
=uestionsD 0hat type of techni4ue did )atalya use1 0hat *ould
she ha(e needed to do if her attempt at le(itating had been
unsuccessful1 0hy *as the phase short%li(ed1 0hat should she ha(e
done upon returning to her body1 0hy did she use the term #astral$1
0ere the articles about astral pro'ection of any significant help1
6ns8ers and CommentsD pon a*a!ening in a state of a sleep
paralysis" )atalya stumbled upon the idea of employing indirect
techni4ues. 6he managed to separate immediately" but if sheFd
encountered problems in doing so" she could ha(e started the
techni4ue of listening in to the #noise$ in her head. The phase *as
short%li(ed due to a lac! of acti(ity and failure to perform deepening
and #maintaining$ techni4ues. 3fter returning to her body" she should
ha(e tried to immediately separate.
)atalya holds esoteric (ie*s on the nature of the phase
phenomenon" *hich is *hy she uses such terminology for it.
8o*e(er" the articles helped her to perform the right actions at the
right moment.
,o .
6lexander 2urmen$o?
Student. Saint Peters3urgJ :ussia
- &o+e up at early in the night after so$e difficulties &ith falling
asleep( Blurred i$ages started to float "efore $y eyes and - reali*ed
that - could enter the phase( - started to discard unnecessary i$ages,
and after getting ahold of one of the$, - e$erged in so$e +ind of a
yello& corridor( The level of general realness and a&areness of the
e#perience &as a"out H7 to !7 of that of reality( - re$e$"ered
a"out the $ethods for deepening, &hich is &hy - started to loo+ at
everything going on around $e, "ut this did not yield any serious
results( - started to touch $yself, "ut all sensation see$ed so$e&hat
da$pened( - reali*ed that - &as losing a&areness( - ca$e round, "ut
nevertheless fell asleep in a"out 2 seconds(
=uestionsD +s it possible to call the techni4ue used in this
description a direct techni4ue1 0hat specific techni4ue for creating
the phase *as employed1 0hich separation techni4ue did 3le&ander
use1 0hat could ha(e been the reason for the #dampened sensation$
and inability to deepen1 0hat caused him to fall asleep1
6ns8ers and CommentsD The techni4ue employed cannot be
considered a direct one" though it *as used at the beginning of the
night. 3s a matter of fact" it appears that the preliminary lapse of
consciousness into sleep *as significant. +f such preliminary sleep
had lasted only se(eral minutes" the techni4ue could ha(e been
considered partially direct. The techni4ue for obser(ing images *as
employed correctly because the images appeared on their o*n.
3le&ander did not employ any techni4ues for separation" as the
obser(ing images techni4ue often brings the obser(er into the
obser(ed image or some other *orld" *hich is e&actly *hat happened
here. Most li!ely" the *ea!ness of the phase *as due to meager le(els
of acti(ity and moti(ation" *hich *ere caused by the fact that it *as
early in the night. The practitioner fell asleep because he failed to
deepen sufficiently and not !eep from falling asleep. 5eneral acti(ity
*as also (ery lo*. The bodyFs desire to fall asleep played a ma'or
role in the process. 3le&ander had" after all" been ha(ing problems
sleeping.
,o. /
:oman :euto?
System 6dministrator. SamaraJ :ussia
Truly, the $ost interesting things al$ost al&ays happen
une#pectedly(
%fter a sufficiently long "rea+ in $y atte$pts to go to the other
&orld, tonight - decided to try it again( - thre& in the to&el after yet
another unsuccessful atte$pt, rolled to $y other side, and decided to
si$ply get a good night.s sleep( - do not +no& e#actly ho& $uch ti$e
passed &hile - lay do&n and thought a"out &hat - &as still doing
&rong &hile o"serving interesting i$ages that $y i$agination &as
dra&ing( But at one fine $o$ent, - suddenly felt the pheno$enon
that is co$$only referred to as vi"rations( - started to intensify the$
B- should add that the feeling is indescri"a"le), "ut - could not
levitate, though - really &anted to ta+e a loo+ at $yself fro$ the
outside( - decided to si$ply stand up, and that.s &hen it all "eca$e
$ost interesting, The entire process of transitioning fro$ a
hori*ontal position to a vertical one &as acco$panied "y
increasingly palpa"le vi"rations and a louder and louder roaring
sound in $y head( The sensation &as the sa$e as that e#perienced
after going to "ed after not having slept for 2I hours and then "eing
suddenly roused "y so$e"ody' $y head spun, everything started
crac+ling inside of it, and - &as a"out to lose consciousness( Then, a
flic+ering picture started to appear( -t sta"ili*ed after one or t&o
seconds, the roaring in $y head died do&n, and - reali*ed that - &as
sitting on $y "ed(
- &as in $y apart$ent, thought it &as noticea"ly altered( My
roo$ see$ed $ore or less the sa$e, though the interior &as indeed
different upon detailed e#a$ination( For e#a$ple, $y $o"ile phone,
&hich is al&ays &ithin a reach, &as so$eho& an older and different
$odel( -t turned out to "e the first o"1ect that - tested, as - suddenly
&anted very $uch to find out &hat ti$e it &as and chec+ &hich day
of the $onth it &as( - distinctly felt the phone in $y hand, "ut upon
atte$pting to concentrate on and loo+ at the display, - &as thro&n
"ac+ into the reality( - i$$ediately cli$"ed "ac+ out of $y "ody and
decided to si$ply pace around the apart$ent &hile trying to
re$e$"er &hat - could e#peri$ent on( - tried to con1ure an o"1ect,
"ut that didn.t &or+ and resulted in so$e $ental activity( This caused
the phase to fade and $y "eing thro&n "ac+ into reality( -n total,
there &ere a"out five successive entries into the phase that lasted for
2 to 8 $inutes each( The e#periences &ere not sta"le at all, &hich is
&hy - &as e#a$ining $y surroundings in a hurry, al&ays trying to
get ahold of anything - could get $y hand on( 0o&ever, there &ere a
good a$ount of i$pressions, considering that it &as $y first entry(
=uestionsD 0hat type of techni4ue did Roman use to enter the
phase1 0hat *ere the !ey precursors of the phase1 0hich separation
techni4ue *as used1 +f Roman had failed to completely separate"
*hat techni4ue" besides (ibrations" should he ha(e considered1 0hat
is the most li!ely reason for all of the fouls1 0hich single action
allo*ed the practitioner to ma!e the phase fi(e times longer1
6ns8ers and CommentsD The phase *as entered through a direct
techni4ue" *ith the comfortable position that Roman *as lying in
being the main catalyst. 3s long as Roman *as lying in an
uncomfortable position" his mind *as unable to completely turn off
physical perception" and this *as most li!ely the reason *hy there
*ere no short lapses in dreaming. +f Roman *ere still unable to
separate *hen using the techni4ue of standing up" or any other
techni4ue besides intensifying the (ibrations" he could ha(e tried
listening in" as there *as some noise.
+nstead of using his first phase e&perience to *or! on mastering
the basic s!ills of deepening and maintaining" Roman immediately
indulged in comple& e&periments" *hich is *hy his multiple entries
*ithin the same phase *ere brief" of poor 4uality" and not used
effecti(ely. 7ut this is all typical during initial e&periences and a lot
*as still accomplished" especially considering that a direct techni4ue
*as used. The relati(e length of the phase *as achie(ed mainly
than!s to complying *ith the single *ay to maintain the phase I
repeated separation" *hich Roman managed to do fi(e times.

,o. 0
6lexander )yren$o?
Student. -osco8J :ussia
My first entry happened at night( - &as lying in "ed and thin+ing
a"out the phase, as - had "een una"le to fall asleep for a &hile( -
do*ed off for a $o$ent and then a&o+e again, this ti$e already in
the proper state, and then easily rolled out B$ore or less
unconsciously and refle#ively)( - &ent deeper "y $eans of touching
and then falling headfirst( -t is a pity that -.ve already forgotten a lot
of the e#perience, "ut - do re$e$"er that after deepening - fell right
do&n onto the yard of $y grand$other.s house, "ut then lost
consciousness, and so - returned into $y "ody and rolled out of it
several ti$es( - &as una"le to sharpen all $y senses' 5hen -
deepened one sense Btouch, for e#a$ple), another Bi(e( sight) &ould
fade a&ay( %fter that, - have a gap in $y $e$ory concerning $y
travels Bconsciousness and lucidity &ere &ea+, and - fell asleep and
>resurfaced? several ti$es), "ut - re$e$"er having "een to a lot of
places(
0ereAs ho& the episode ended' - dove headfirst into &ater fro$ a
high "oard Bafter first having deepened a "it), and then $y sense of
touch gre& sharper' - felt >&ater? and hit $y head against a very
soft >"otto$(? - resu$ed the interrupted fall through &illpo&er, "ut
then it occurred to $e that $y grand$other &anted to &a+e $e up(
My level of a&areness &as not 4uite ade4uate, as it did not occur to
$e that - &as actually sleeping in a dor$itory, and not at $y
grand$otherAs house( That.s &hy - decided that - needed to return to
$y "ody( % sharp fall occurred right after that thought, and &as
follo&ed "y sensations si$ilar to those one e#periences &hen hung-
over(
=uestionsD 0as a direct or indirect techni4ue applied1 0hat
made the implementation of the techni4ue successful1 0hy *as
3le&ander e'ected into his grandmotherGs yard1 0hile deepening"
ho* could the problem of the senses being enhanced only one at a
time ha(e been sol(ed1 0hy did the practitioner ha(e gaps in his
memory1 0hat *ere the main problems associated *ith maintaining
the phase1
6ns8ers and CommentsD 9espite the brief lapse in
consciousness" the techni4ue used *as a direct one" and that (ery
lapse facilitated the immediate emergence of the necessary state" e(en
though this *as 3le&anderFs first e&perience. The e'ection into his
grandmotherGs yard *as spontaneous" and *as most li!ely caused by
some preceding thoughts about the yard or being in a habit of going
there. ne&pected translocation often occurs *hen deepening *hile
falling headfirst.
Ouite possibly" in order to a(oid ha(ing the senses of sight and
touch enhance only one at a time" he should ha(e simultaneously
applied the techni4ues of touching and loo!ing out. 3s for
maintaining the phase" there *ere three main problems that *ere also
direct causes of the gaps in 3le&anderGs memory/ little depth" lac! of
a clear plan of action" and non%compliance *ith the rules for
maintaining the phase (*ith the e&ception of multiple entries after
return to the body).
,o. 1
S?yatosla? Barano?
Student. PermJ :ussia
- &o+e up on $y side( - didn.t feel li+e sleeping any$ore, "ut -
closed $y eyes any&ay( 5hen - lay do&n on $y "ac+, - i$$ediately
felt the sensation that - &as a"out to fall fro$ the couch B- &as lying
on the edge), and so$e +ind of lapse occurred, as if - &as "eing
pulled so$e&here( - lay do&n once again, and this "u**ing started,
and a green light appeared "efore $y eyes( - lay "ac+ even further,
and $y eyelids started to flutter( - thought that - $ight fall fro$ the
couch at that $o$ent, "ut then $y vision ca$e to $e, and - o"served
that - &as already lying on the floor ne#t to the couch, - got up on $y
feet and noticed that the roo$ &as >spinning? as if - &ere drun+, "ut
everything 4uite 4uic+ly &ent "ac+ to nor$al( %t that very $o$ent, -
understood that this &as it, The phase itself,
-n ecstasy, - forgot a"out all the techni4ues and &ent to loo+
a"out the roo$( 2verything &as 1ust li+e in reality, "ut so$e things
&ere out of place( - tried to levitate and "ent "ac+&ards, and &as
so$eho& thrust outside( -t &as dus+ out there, and there &as a lot of
sno& on the ground( - &ent around the house and tried to levitate( -
&as a"le to soar up&ards, and sa& the hori*on and sunset( But then -
"egan to lose altitude( %fter having flo&n to the &indo& on the other
side of the house, - &anted to go up to the roof, "ut then a foul
occurred( -n a fraction of a second, - had the sensation that - &as
>no&here?( But then, $y real eyes opened B&ith difficulty) and there
&as once again the feeling of so$e sort of lapse( %&areness &as di$
during the phase, apparently due to not having gotten enough sleep(
=uestionsD 0hat !ind of phase entrance techni4ue did 6(yatosla(
use1 0hich specific techni4ue produced results1 0hich separation
techni4ue *as employed1 +f separation *as unsuccessful" *hich
techni4ue should ha(e been immediately used1 0hich important
actions did he not perform enough after entering the phase1 0hat
should ha(e been done after the foul1 0hy *as a*areness dim
during the phase1
6ns8ers and CommentaryD 3n indirect techni4ue *as
employed. )o phase state creation techni4ues *ere employed by
6(yatosla(. +nstead" separation immediately *or!ed through rolling
bac!*ards. +f separation *ere unsuccessful" he should ha(e
proceeded *ith obser(ing images" *hich *ould ha(e been possible
*ith the green light.
9eepening *as not immediately performed" no effort *as made to
maintain" and there *as no appro&imation of a plan of actionJ
ho*e(er" this is not a crucial factor during initial e&periences.
3nother attempt to enter the phase should ha(e been made upon
returning to the body" but this *as also forgotten. 3*areness *as dim
and memory *as *ea! during the phase because of the initial
shallo*ness of the state" *hich *as reflected in the perception of the
surrounding and also the thought processes.
,o. !5
Oleg Sushchen$o
Sortsman. -osco8J :ussia
Mast night - spent a"out an hour developing the interplay of
i$ages in $y $ind after - no left felt any feeling of +inesthetic sense(
- &as lying on $y "ac+ in an unco$forta"le position( %fter sliding
to&ards sleep for so$e ti$e, - felt slight vi"rations and echoes of
sounds fro$ the drea$ &orld, "ut the unco$forta"le position still
hindered $e( -n the end, - thought the hec+ &ith it, and decided to lie
do&n ho&ever &as co$forta"le, and turned over to lie on $y
sto$ach( 3espite the fact that the $ove$ent upset the process, after
a"out five $inutes the state "egan to return and "uild up( - &as a"le
to get a little vi"ration this ti$e, although - &as una"le to a$plify it(
- dre& a picture of $y +itchen in $y $ind, and "ecause the i$ages in
that state &ere really vivid, strong, and realistic, after so$e ti$e -
understood that not only &ere $y attention and a&areness there, "ut
so &ere $y "odily sensations( - &as 4uite surprised that the phase
had "een so easy to fall in to Bthere &as no dou"t that this &as the
phase)(
- 1u$ped out through the &indo& and "egan to fly around the
courtyard( %ctually, it &as the first ti$e that - had flo&n only upon a
single $ental co$$and, &ithout any physical effort, as occurs
during drea$s( The courtyard "ore only 17 si$ilarity to its real-life
counterpart, "ut - &as not at all surprised "y this, and - si$ply
en1oyed it as $uch as - could, as - &as a"le see and &as not
i$$ediately thro&n out( But, after having loo+ed at and ta+en in the
city, the thought of &hether or not this &as the phase and not 1ust a
lucid drea$ occurred( - &as so conscious in the drea$ that - &as
a"le to +no& a"out and co$prehend such ter$s, and differentiate
"et&een the$ - can you i$agineG, - have to add that - gave little
attention to $y $e$ory, so - can.t say ho& $uch of $y >self-
a&areness? &as there, "ut - &as a&are enough to "e a"le to
differentiate "et&een the phase and a lucid drea$ Bor at least thin+
a"out the difference)( - even &ent and as+ed people around if it &as
the phase or a lucid drea$( Sounds funny, doesnAt itG The funniest
thing &as that they ans&ered that it &as a different &orld, and they
refused to discuss the topic any further &ith $e( Then, - decided to
not get $y $ind all $i#ed up and 1ust go &ith the plot, &hich turned
out to "e 4uite long and uninterrupted, - recalled a $o$ent fro$ the
day "efore ho& - had lain do&n and induced the phase &hile lying on
$y "ac+, and ho& - had turned over and flo&n a&ay( - recalled all
this periodically during the course of the phase, and reali*ed that -
should try to as+ a"out &hat had "een going on &ith $e on the foru$
later(
Then, later in the phase, - found $yself in a "ase$ent( %s there
&as 1ust a really nasty s$ell there, - decided that - had already had
enough and that it &as ti$e to go "ac+( That happened even $ore
easily, as soon as - thought a"out going "ac+, a vi"ration as light as
a "ree*e &ent through $e and then - &as "ac+ in $y "ody &ith full
a&areness and a &ell-rested "ody and $ind( - &as co$pletely
refreshed, %nd that.s despite the fact that - re$e$"er everything,
every second of the drea$, fro$ the $o$ent - started flying,
=uestionsD 0hich type of techni4ue helped Oleg enter the phase1
0hat initially made it harder for him to enter the phase" and could
this ha(e had a positi(e effect on later results1 0hat can be said of
techni4ues related to (ibrations in the conte&t of OlegGs entry into the
phase1 0hich specific techni4ue brought him into the phase1 0hich
initial actions should ha(e been ta!en upon entry into the phase1
0hat *as lac!ing that could ha(e lead to producti(e use of the
phase1 0as it *orth*hile to immediately translocate by 'umping
through the *indo*1 0hat *as the cause of reflection on *hether
the e&perience *as the phase or a conscious dream1 0as it beneficial
to try to offhandedly learn from ob'ects *hat type of state this *as1
0hy did the desire to return bac! to the body arise" and *hat could
ha(e caused it1
6ns8ers and CommentaryD Oleg entered the phase using a
direct techni4ue. 8e *as initially unable to enter due to the
uncomfortable position that he had assumed" although lapses in
consciousness into short dreams did occur. )e(ertheless" the initially
unsuccessful techni4ue still ended in a positi(e final outcome because
the state that Oleg *as in *as close to the phase. 8o*e(er" attention
should not ha(e been gi(en to (ibration amplification techni4ues"
especially straining the brain and straining the body *ithout using
muscles" as they can be detrimental during direct techni4ues.
The techni4ue of (isuali?ation *as used immediately before
entering the phase instead of obser(ing images" *hich is used more
often. Oleg deliberately con'ured the obser(ed images instead of
searching for them in front of himself" *hich is *here the difference
bet*een the techni4ues lies. 8o*e(er" he did not perform deepening
upon entering the phase. 3dditionally" he had no clear plan of action
to ensure that the phase *ould be producti(e 6tarting to translocate
by 'umping through *indo*s should only be done by those *ith a
certain amount of e&perience since beginners sometimes percei(e
reality to be the phase" or the phase to be reality.
The reason for the reflection on the nature of the phenomenon
*as due to terminological confusion" *hich is 4uite *idespread. +f a
practitioner is a*are but does not feel the body as in the physical
*orld" then it can be assumed that the phase has been entered. This is
*hy there *as no reason to in4uire about this among animate ob'ects.
9eliberately returning to the body *as a big mista!e. There *as
no reason to thro* a*ay an opportunity to tra(el and use the phase.
7eginners are not often afforded such an opportunity. The reason for
the return to the body in this case is most li!ely found in the absence
of a plan of action and lac! of clear understanding of ho* the phase
might be used for practical aims.
,o. !!
6lexander <ele$o?
Comuter Programmer. Saint Peters3urgJ :ussia
- tried all night to use the %stral :atapult that cues you &hen
you.re drea$ing, "ut - gave up on the idea after several unsuccessful
a&a+enings and si$ply fell asleep( 5hen -A$ drea$ing - usually
$ove "y ta+ing great leaps, $uch further than a +angaroo, a"out
1-8 yards( This happens regularly in $y drea$s, and - usually
i$$ediately reali*e that -A$ in a drea$( 3uring one of the leaps, -
reali*ed &hile air"orne that - &as drea$ing and also reali*ed that -
&as a"le to land in a s$all dirty pond( %s e#pected, - landed right in
the pond and &ent deep under the &ater( %nd at that very $o$ent, -
found $yself in the stencil, &ith $y hands and head half stuc+ in it(
- got a little nervous that this atte$pt &ould also "e unsuccessful,
and so - i$$ediately tried to separate fro$ $y "ody( - &as una"le to
get $y head or hands out, and for the first ti$e - tried to turn around
round $y a#is and $anaged to get out( Then - either slipped do&n or
fell fro$ the "ed, "ut - did not feel any pain( - cra&led for 1-2 $eters
and then felt that - could go "ac+( - started to touch the rug and so$e
other thing, though - don.t +no& e#actly &hat it &as as it &as dar+,
and, lo and "ehold' &ithin 2-8 seconds - pro"a"ly felt &hat s$all
+ittens feel &hen their eyes open for the first ti$e( 2verything &as
foggy and "lurry at first, "ut then a picture started to appear, the
roo$ filled &ith light, and colors "eca$e "right and vivid( - tried
very hard to restrain $y e#cite$ent, and, to $y surprise, &as a"le to(
- &al+ed around $y apart$ent thin+ing a"out &hat - should do(
Reali*ing that - did not have that $uch ti$e, - decided to tal+ to an
elderly $an &ho &ould ans&er $y 4uestions( - decided that there
&ould "e an o$niscient elderly $an "ehind the apart$entAs front
door, &hich - &as a"out to open( %nd there he &as, half-"ald, a"out
K years old, in a grey coat &aiting for $e( - as+ed hi$ the 4uestion,
>5hat should - do to get into the phase $ore oftenG? But he started
to tell $e a"out ho& he &as raped as a child( %nd to "e $ore precise,
this &as already not an elderly $an, "ut an elderly &o$an( - &as not
very interested in hearing her story, thus - tried to $ove a&ay fro$
her, suggesting that &e could tal+ later( But the elderly &o$an &as
persistent, and - did not &ant to offend her, "ecause - thought that
this &as an unusual drea$ &ith its o&n set of rules, and na$ely that
once you have as+ed an old &o$an a 4uestion, you are supposed to
"e courteous and listen to the entire ans&er(
- &ent &ith her to the +itchen of $y apart$ent( The telephone
suddenly rang( - got scared that the telephone &as ringing in $y
apart$ent and &ould &a+e $e up, &hich is &hy - i$$ediately
started to loo+ at $y hand in order to $aintain( But the sensations
&ere 4uite sta"le, and - stopped doing that( Then, $e and this lady
&anted to coo+ so$ething in $y +itchen( She said that - could heat a
frying pan &ithout gas( But - instead decided to try the techni4ue of
putting the hands together and "lo&ing on the$, and returned "ac+
into $y "ody(
=uestionsD 0hich type of the entry into the phase did 3le&ander
describe1 0as the cueing program of any help1 0hich type of anchor
*as the leaping1 0hy *as the onset of consciousness immediately
follo*ed by a transition into the stencil" i.e." the real body" though not
completely1 0hich separation techni4ue helped him to get out of his
body again1 0hich techni4ue *as used for deepening1 0hich
techni4ue for materiali?ing an ob'ect *as used correctly1 0hat
should the procedure for obtaining information ha(e been started
*ith1 0hat importance does a polite attitude to*ards elderly *omen
in the phase ha(e1 0hy *as the return to body possible1 0hat did
3le&ander either forget to do or forget to record right after the foul1
6ns8ers and CommentsD 3le&ander described an entry into the
phase through dream consciousness. 7y and large" the onset of
consciousness *as facilitated by prior *or! *ith the cueing program"
*hich" though it failed to yield results" strengthened the necessary
intention to enter the phase. The leaping that accompanied the onset
of consciousness may be compared *ith the sensations of le(itation
that often lead to practitioners achie(ing dream consciousness. 6ince
the techni4ues for deepening and maintaining *ere not used at the
moment of dream consciousness" a return to the body" though partial"
naturally occurred.
Furthermore" 3le&ander managed to apply a separation techni4ue
that most resembled climbing out. 8e then managed to deepen
correctly by means of touching and immediately felt a result. 9espite
the lac! of a plan of action" the practitioner competently decided to
do something useful and employed the techni4ue of finding through a
door in order to locate an animate source of information. 8e should
ha(e first tried to test the sub'ect by as!ing special 4uestions to
determine if the ob'ect *ould be able to pro(ide information (see
.hapter 1C).
7eing polite to animate ob'ects in the phase is the prerogati(e of
each person on an indi(idual basis" but it hardly has any real basis.
Most li!ely" the return to the body *as triggered by a failure to
maintain" e&cessi(e thin!ing" or temporary passi(ity. pon e&iting
the phase" 3le&ander should ha(e tried to immediately return.
8o*e(er" he failed to do so" e(en though he had returned to the phase
after e&iting dream consciousness. 6uch a step should ha(e been
ob(ious due to an incomplete connection to the body.
,o. !%
Boris Bender
-o?ie &echnicianJ Exerienced Practitioner of the Phase.
-osco8J :ussia
- "eca$e conscious in $y drea$ al$ost i$$ediately after falling
asleep( - &as in $y apart$ent standing in the corridor( Being
surprised "y having so suddenly found $yself in the phase, - started
to touch the &alls &ith $y hands to test their fir$ness or, Orealness,O
as &ell as to intensify the phase "y touching( - entered the roo$(
There &as a "ed standing ne#t to the &all, &ith $y $other sleeping
on it( - could not see her face, only her "ody under the "lan+et( The
roo$ and corridor &ere e#act replicas of their real-life counterparts(
5hile thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other, - suddenly started to
feel so$e&hat uneasy( 5hen - approached the &indo&, - sa& a
grotes4ue landscape "ehind it that &as si$ilar to pictures fro$
$ovies a"out catastrophes' a &asteland, houses in ruins, odd pileups
of "uilding $aterials, sla"s of concrete, gar"age, craters fro$
e#plosions here and there, and - noticed hu$an figures in so$e
places(
Fearing a foul caused "y the fact that - &as ta+ing in a
panora$ic vie& Bthe vie& fro$ the &indo& spanned 1H degrees and
cut off at the hori*on, &hich is in fact al$ost e#actly as the vie& fro$
$y apart$ent is in real life), - turned "ac+ into the roo$ and started
to touch the &ardro"e, and then +nelt do&n to touch the floor( %ll the
&hile, $y fear had "een gro&ing stronger and stronger' "oth out of
thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other and due to the vie& fro$ the
&indo&( %n#iety turned into real fear &ithin a $atter of several
seconds, and then graduated into terror and panic( - lost the a"ility
to thin+ critically( - had only one thought' - had to go "ac+ to $y
"ody( - darted "ac+ to $y "ed and suddenly found $yself lying on it( -
closed $y eyes, "ut could not understand if - &ere in $y real "ody or
still in the phase( My terror gre& even stronger &hen - half-opened
$y eyes and sa& that $y $other &as getting up fro$ her "ed( She
loo+ed li+e a character fro$ a horror $ovie and apparently &as
hostile to $e(
- &anted to disappear, dissolve, and &a+e up, - hectically tried to
recall the techni4ues for an e$ergency e#it fro$ the phase, "ut &ith
poor results' - tried to free*e, rela# and touch $y fingers to $y toes
in order to feel a connection &ith $y real "ody( %t so$e $o$ents -
felt li+e - had it, thin+ing, >The connection had "een restored,? -
opened $y eyes, "ut reali*ed that - &as still in the phase &hen - sa&
that the roo$ had changed, and &as no& a&ash &ith gar"age(
The fact that the atte$pts +ept ending &ith false a&a+enings &as
driving $e cra*y( - &as especially shoc+ed &hen - got up after one of
the false a&a+enings and sa& $y $other standing at $y "ed, still
loo+ing threateningly at $e, li+e a va$pire or a *o$"ie fro$ a horror
$ovie( Elus, she started to reach out to&ard $e &ith her hands,
- nevertheless +ept on and tried to free*e and &iggle $y toes, this
ti$e &ithout opening $y eyes, and not chec+ing &here - &as( -
started to cal$ do&n after so$e ti$e, "ut - &as una"le to feel $y
real "ody, &hich &as confir$ed "y the fact that sounds &ere co$ing
in fro$ the phase' - heard sparro&s chirping outside the &indo&,
though it reality it &as too late for sparro&s to "e out( 0o&ever, the
chirping and the associations that it "rought Bi(e( day, &ar$th,
sparro&s, and sun), pro"a"ly helped $e a lot and cal$ed $e do&n,
as - finally $anaged to sense $y real "ody and found $yself in
reality( /evertheless, after - got up, - i$$ediately started to verify for
a"out half a $inute that - &as no longer in the phase "y touching
o"1ects, $a+ing sure that they &ere hard, and feeling all of $y "odily
sensations(
=uestionsD 0hy *as there a ris! that 7oris could return to his
body *hen ta!ing in the (ie* from the *indo*1 8o* could 7oris
ha(e e&amined the panoramic (ie* from the *indo* *ithout
*orrying about a foul1 0hich techni4ue for deepening and
#maintaining$ *as employed se(eral times1 0hat *ould ha(e
happened if 7oris translocated from the source of the fear to another
place1 8o* could he ha(e o(ercome this problem1 0hy *as 7oris
unable to easily e&it the phase and *hy *ere all of the techni4ues that
he !ne* of no practical use1
6ns8ers and CommentsD 0hen e&amining distant ob'ects in the
phase" there is al*ays a ris! of returning to oneFs body because the
acti(ity is rela&ing and rela&ation is detrimental to the length of a
phase. 7oris could ha(e continued to ta!e in the (ie* by
simultaneously !eeping up (ibrations" periodically e&amining his
hands" or rubbing them together. 9uring the entire length of 7orisFs
phase" he performed sensory amplification by touching to deepen and
maintain the phase.
+f he tried to run a*ay from his mother to another place in the
phase" she probably *ould ha(e caught up *ith him there any*ay.
8e should ha(e tried to yell at her in an aggressi(e tone. This *ould
ha(e helped him to o(ercome his fear and either scare the ob'ect
a*ay or ma!e it more agreeable. Problems *ith an emergency e&it
from the phase arose because it *as the beginning of the night and
the mind still needed to dream and" thus" !ept pulling him into that
process.
,o. !(
6lexei &eslen$o
I& EngineerJ Exerienced Practitioner of the Phase. -osco8J
:ussia
%ctually, - &as not planning to travel that night, "ut &hen - &o+e
up around $idnight - decided to try to enter the phase nevertheless( -
started to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith $y ar$s, "ut then a
strong sleepy lethargy overca$e $e and - suddenly &anted to give up
$y atte$pts to enter the phase and si$ply fall asleep( 0o&ever, - &as
persistent and continued to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith $y
ar$s( -nstead of feeling the usual vi"rations that occur &hen this
techni4ue is perfor$ed, - si$ply fell asleep and continued the
phanto$ $ove$ents &hile drea$ing( Because of that, $y
consciousness apparently did not fall asleep co$pletely, and -
"eca$e a&are that - &as drea$ing(
- i$$ediately cli$"ed out of $y "ody( There &as no vision,
conscious a&areness &as no $ore than 67, so the phase &as not
that deep( -n order to $aintain the phase, - i$$ediately started
chaotically touching everything around $e( -t helped( Fision ca$e,
though it &as $ur+y( - then found $yself in $y apart$ent( - decided
to strive to deepen( 2ach ti$e that - e#ercised that techni4ue, the
phase "eca$e deeper and deeper( %fter - had achieved a sta"le
phase, - decided that it &ould "e good to gra" a snac+ and headed
for the fridge( - should add that - &as on a strict diet at the ti$e and
&as craving so$ething s&eet or fried( 0o&ever, &hen - opened the
fridge, - &as 4uite disappointed( There &as a lot of food in the fridge,
"ut all of it re4uired preparation Bra& $eat, fish, dill, etc()( 0o&ever,
there &as a "ottle of spar+ling $ineral &ater on a special lo&er shelf
in the fridge( 5ithout giving it any thought, - too+ the "ottle and
started to chug it(
%ll of the sensations &ere 1ust as in real life' - felt the "u""les
fro$ the car"onation, that peculiar taste that $ineral &ater has, and
also ho& the &ater &ent do&n $y throat( -n general, everything &as
4uite realistic, though there &as no sensation of $y sto$ach filling
up &ith &ater and, $oreover, the &ater felt so$e&hat dry( -t sounds
funny, "ut that very feeling of &ater.s dryness spoiled $y overall
i$pression so$e&hat( %fter a foul, - reali*ed that a possi"le reason
for this $ight have "een dryness in the $outh of $y real "ody(
<sually, if there are, for e#a$ple, candies in the +itchen or in the
fridge, - actually ta+e a handful of the$ and consu$e the$ &hile
traveling through the phase(
%fter going to the fridge, - &anted to see so$ething interesting( -
decided to e$ploy the techni4ue for creating o"1ects and people, and
so - closed $y eyes and focused on the i$age of a girl &ho$ -
&anted to see at that very $o$ent( - affir$ed $y desire, and - then
opened $y eyes, concentrating on the area to $y side( The air gre&
$isty at first, and then the person - &as e#pecting $ateriali*ed out of
the air, and ca$e to life, see$ingly fully autono$ous and &ith free
&ill - she had the sa$e $anner of spea+ing as in real life, and acted
in the sa$e &ay( The foul happened &hile $y conversation &ith the
girl &as in full s&ingP
=uestionsD 0hich type of the techni4ue did 3le&ei ultimately
use1 0hy did lethargy and dro*siness arise during phantom
*iggling1 0hat should be done in this type of situation1 0hat *as
most li!ely lac!ing *hen the indirect techni4ue *as performed" and
*hy did the e&perience end *ith 3le&ei falling asleep1 0hat
techni4ues for deepening *ere used1 0hat could ha(e been done to
4uic!ly fill the fridge *ith ready%to%eat food1 0hich techni4ue for
finding an ob'ect *as used *ith regard to the girl1 0hat else could
ha(e been used for the same purpose" considering 3le&eiGs actions1
0hat should ha(e been done immediately after the foul1 8o* many
practical applications of the phase did 3le&ei manage to try1
6ns8ers and CommentsD The entry to the phase happened
because 3le&ei had become a*are that he *as dreaming *hile he
rightly tried to resist the sudden tiredness and dro*siness o(er the
course of the unsuccessful attempt *ith the indirect techni4ue of
phantom *iggling. sually" such dro*siness signifies that a phase is
approaching" signaling a need for aggression" acti(eness and attention
in order to o(ercome inertia and enter the phase. 8o*e(er"
attenti(eness *as lac!ing" so 3le&ei fell asleep. 8o*e(er" his desire
to enter the phase *as so strong that the phantom *iggling continued
e(en *hile he *as dreaming" causing him to e&perience dream
consciousness.
3mong techni4ues employed for deepening *ere sensory
amplification through touching and 'ogging. +t *ould ha(e been
sufficient to employ the techni4ue of finding through a door to ensure
that the fridge *as properly stoc!ed. For e&ample" 3le&ei should
ha(e closed the door on the refrigerator" focused his attention on a
full stoc! of snac!s and food" and then opened the door to disco(er
that e(erything heFd en(isioned *as there.
The techni4ue for finding an ob'ect through transformation *as
used to ma!e the girl appear" but this techni4ue should be considered
only by e&perienced practitioners because it can lead to a foul in case
of insufficient concentration. 7efore employing the techni4ue" 3le&ei
shut his eyes" and only then imagined the girl right in front of him.
8e could ha(e immediately created her using the techni4ue of closed
eyes" *hich usually is easier to do since there is no direct (isual
contact *ith surroundings.
pon returning to his body" he should ha(e tried to separate again.
3ltogether" 3le&ei managed to and ma!e progress in t*o specific"
applied tas!s" though did not complete them satisfactorily.
Exercises for Chater !%
&as$s
Try to assess the e&periences described abo(e using the rubric
belo*. The ans*ers are located in the appendi&.
+-Point System for 6ssessing the =uality
of Out-of-Body Exeriences APhasesB
9eliberate entry into the phase using any techni4ue Q1
The phase *orld *as realistic or *as made realistic Q1
Phase *as of a(erage or abo(e%a(erage duration (- minutes or
more)
Q1
9eliberate use of the phase to *or! to*ards a specific goal Q1
9eliberately studying the phase or e&perimenting *ith it *hile
in it.
Q1
+f there is some doubt any regarding any item" only half a point
should be a*arded.
Chater !( - Putting a 2ace on the Phenomenon
Stehen <aBerge
6tephen 2a7erge *as born in 1B<@ in the
nited 6tates. 3t the age of 1B" he recei(ed a
7achelorFs 9egree in mathematics from 3ri?ona
6tate ni(ersity" after *hich he enrolled as a
graduate student in the .hemistry program at
6tanford ni(ersity. +n 1B>B" he too! an academic
lea(e of absence.
8e returned to 6tanford in 1B@@ and began
studying the human mind" including sub'ects
related to dreaming. 2a7erge recei(ed his Ph.9. in psychophysiology
in 1BAC. 8e founded the 2ucidity +nstitute in 1BA@.
6tephen 2a7erge has made the largest scientific contribution to
the study of phase states. +t suffices to say that 2a7erge *as the first
in the *orld to pro(e during a full%fledged scientific e&periment that
it is possible to become conscious *hile dreaming This *as done
through logging specific signals made *ith the eyes by a person
dreaming *hile sleeping under measurement instruments. These
e&periments also pro(ed that eye mo(ement in the physical body and
percei(ed body are synchronous.
Mucid 3rea$ing" first published in 1BA=" is 2a7ergeGs most *ell%
!no*n boo!. Exploring the World of Lucid Dreaming, a
book that LaBerge wrote with Howard Rheingold, was
published in 1990. +t *as mainly than!s to the efforts of 2a7erge
that mind%machines for achie(ing dream consciousness *ere created"
such as 9ream2ight" )o(a9reamer" and 9reamMa!er.
The !ey feature of 2a7ergeFs *or! and achie(ements is an
absolutely pragmatic approach to the nature of the phenomenon.
3rguably" he is one of the fe* authors and researchers totally lac!ing
in irrationality. E(erything that can be read and learned from his
boo!s is (erifiable and accessible for e(eryone" *ith no peddling of
out%of%this%*orld superpo*ers.
Carlos Castaneda
9ue to .arlos .astanedaFs desire to follo* the
spiritual practice of the 0arriorFs Path" *hich
entails erasing oneFs personal history" the details
of his biography are unclear. 3s far as
.astanedaFs early years are concerned" it can only
be stated that he *as born outside of the nited
6tates sometime bet*een 1B-= and 1B:=. 8e
enrolled at the ni(ersity of .alifornia" 2os
3ngeles (.23) in the 1B>Cs" *here he recei(ed a Ph.9. in
anthropology on the basis of his boo!s.
.astanedaFs entire life path *as de(oted to studying the teachings
of a certain Euan Matus or don Euan .achora. +t is more than li!ely
that his persona is a composite%image of an +ndian 6haman" a
sorcerer" and an heir of the culture of the ancient #Toltecs$.
.astaneda *rote a do?en boo!sJ ho*e(er" the boo! The %rt of
3rea$ing (1BB:) has the most to do *ith the phase state. +t contains
se(eral effecti(e techni4ues for entering the phase through dream
consciousness. 8is sub'ect matter is soa!ed in a large amount of
mysticism and (irtually de(oid of any pragmatism.
9espite the fact that the main orientation of .astanedaFs *or! did
not touch upon the phase state" he ne(ertheless became one of the
founding fathers of this field" as his general popularity reached
massi(e proportions *orld*ide.
.arlos .astaneda passed a*ay in 1BBA.
:o3ert 6. -onroe
Robert Monroe *as born in the nited 6tates
in 1B1=. +n 1B:@" he graduated from Ohio 6tate
ni(ersity *ith a degree in Engineering. 8e
*or!ed for some time as a radio program
producer and director until he established his o*n
radio company in )e* Por!" *hich rapidly
e&panded.
+n 1B=>" his company also conducted a study
about the effect of sound *a(es on the abilities of
the mind.
+n 1B=A" Monroe had an accidental personal e&perience *ith the
phase phenomenon" *hich strongly sto!ed his interest in the sub'ect
to *hich he *ould de(ote his entire career. +n 1B@<" he founded the
Monroe +nstitute" *hich *as entirely de(oted to studying unusual
states of consciousness and the ability to influence them through
audio stimulation and other technologies. One of its main
achie(ements *as the creation of the 8emi%6ync system" *hich *as
designed to help a person reach altered states of consciousness"
including out%of%body states" by synchroni?ing the t*o hemispheres
of the brain.
8is first boo!" Journeys Out of the Body" *as published in 1B@1.
T*o boo!s then follo*ed/ Far Journeys (1BA=) and <lti$ate
Journey (1BB<).
Robert Monroe has" so far" made the largest contribution to*ard
populari?ing the phase state. 8o*e(er" he understood the phase more
as an actual e&it of the mind from the body" *hich is *hy the term
#out%of%body e&perience$ (O7E) *as introduced. The boo! Journeys
Out of the Body *as such a massi(e success that Monroe 4uic!ly
became an undisputed authority in the field.
8o*e(er" the large influence of mysticism on MonroeFs *or! and
(ie*s cannot be ignored. This is especially apparent after his second
boo!. The ma'ority of phenomena described in the boo! ha(e not
been (erified in practice. The only attempt at conducting a full%
fledged scientific e&periment pro(ing that the mind left the body *as
unsuccessful. +n the end" typical misconceptions about the phase
became *idespread" as did a*areness of the e&istence of out%of%body
e&periences.
Robert Monroe passed a*ay in 1BB=.
Patricia #arfield
Patricia 5arfield *as born in 1B:< in the
nited 6tates. From the age of 1<" she !ept an
uninterrupted daily dream 'ournal that *ould allo*
her and all of humanity great insight into dreams
phenomena associated *ith the phase.
6he *as one of the founders of The 3ssociation
for the 6tudy of 9reams. 9r. 5arfield holds a Ph.9.
in clinical psychology.
6he is the author of a great number of boo!s" *ith the 1B@< best%
seller :reative 3rea$ing being the most *idely lauded. +t *as one of
the first pieces of literature to approach the phase state in a practical
and non%specialist *ay" and recei(ed *orld*ide interest and
appreciation. The boo! contains good practical guidelines and also
describes the dreaming practices of (arious cultures.
Syl?an -uldoon
6yl(an Muldoon *as born in the nited
6tates in 1BC:. 8e is considered to be the
3merican pioneer in the study of the phase"
although he used the esoteric term astral. 8e
inad(ertently *o!e up in the phase at the age of
1-" *here he sa* a cord connecting his percei(ed
body to his real body. Muldoon first thought that
he *as dying during the e&perience" although he
e(entually concluded that this *as an instance of
#astral pro'ection$. 8e had repeated e&perience *ith the
phenomenon" but Muldoon *as still unable to become an ad(anced
practitioner due to a lac! of full control o(er the practice.
3fter coordinating efforts *ith 8ere*ard .arrington" the famous
3merican in(estigator of the un!no*n" the t*o published the
sensational" 'ointly authored boo! The Ero1ection of the %stral Body
in 1B-B. The authors published t*o other boo!s/ The :ase for %stral
Ero1ection (1B:>) and The Eheno$ena of %stral Ero1ection (1B=1).
9espite a large ser(ing of esotericism" MuldoonFs boo!s"
(especially the first one) contain a lot of helpful" practical information
and e&planation of the most di(erse phenomena that can occur during
the phase. 8o*e(er" Muldoon is considered to be the greatest
populari?er of irrational esoteric terms and theories" *hich
subse4uently became 4uite *idespread.
6yl(an Muldoon passed a*ay in 1B@1.
Charles <ead3eater
.harles 2eadbeater *as born in England in
1A<@ (1A=< according to some sources). 3fter
dropping out of O&ford due to hard times"
2eadbeater became an ordained priest" but then
became 4uite acti(e in the occult. This led to his
becoming a member of the Theosophical 6ociety
in 1AA:. 2eadbeater became one of its most
famous participants.
The combination of a bright mind" scientific
!no*ledge" and interest in the paranormal led him
to publish many boo!s on many di(erse topics. One of them"
3rea$s' 5hat They %re and 0o& They %re :aused (1ABA)" *as one
of the first *or!s to touch upon the phenomenon of the phase.
2eadbeaterFs *riting is saddled *ith a ton of esoteric terms and
theories. +n it" the term astral plane is predominantly used for the
phase. )e(ertheless" the boo! is not *ithout some helpful guidelines
concerning techni4ues.
.harles 2eadbeater passed a*ay in 1B:<.
:o3ert Bruce
Robert 7ruce *as born in England in 1B==.
8e has performed his lifeGs *or! *hile li(ing in
3ustralia. 3fter studying and promoting
dissociati(e phenomena for many years" by the
beginning of the -1
st
century he had become one
of the leading authorities in the field. 8e is also a
specialist in many other paranormal fields of
study.
Robert 7ruce *rote se(eral boo!s" the most
important and *ell !no*n of *hich is %stral 3yna$ics (1BBB). The
author holds 4uite open esoteric (ie*s" *hich are (ery strongly
reflected in his theories and terminology. The helpful" practical
guidelines in his boo!s are 4uite often loaded *ith a large amount of
information that has not been (erified or pro(en by anyone. Robert
7ruce is also a propagator of typical superstitions and stereotypes
concerning the phase phenomenon.
:ichard We3ster
Richard 0ebster *as born in )e* Realand"
*here he still resides.
8e is the author of about =C publications that
ha(e sold many millions of copies around the
*orld. 8o*e(er" only one of them" %stral Travel
for Beginners" is completely de(oted to the phase
state. The boo! is saturated *ith *idespread
misconceptions about the phase phenomenon and
misguided theories trying to e&plain it. The techni4ue%related aspect
of the boo! is also presented ineffecti(ely.
+t is 4uite li!ely that the author himself has no practical
e&perience" *hich can also be said for the contents of his other
do?ens of boo!s de(oted to (arious topics.
Charles &art
.harles Tart *as born in the nited 6tates in
1B:@. 8e recei(ed his Ph. 9. in psychology in
1B>: at the ni(ersity of )orth .arolina. Tart also
recei(ed training at 6tanford ni(ersity. 8e *as
one of the founders of transpersonal psychology.
8e became one of the most preeminent
researchers of unusual states of a*areness after
the publication of %ltered States of :onsciousness
(1B>B)" the first boo! that he *or!ed on. +t *as one of the first boo!s
to e&amine entering the phase through dream consciousness. The
boo! recei(ed popularity *hen the use 269 and Mari'uana *ere
often (ie*ed as (ehicles to ele(ated consciousness" and the boo!
e(en describes the use of chemical substances in the conte&t of phase
states.
Chater !* " 2inal &est
The 4uestions on the test may ha(e one or more correct ans*ers"
or none of the ans*ers may be correct. Thus" the 4uestions must be
read completely through" and attention must be paid to their
implications and finer points.
3 studentFs theoretical !no*ledge is considered to be satisfactory
if the correct ans*ers to at least one%half of the 4uestions are gi(en. +f
a score of less than =CK is recei(ed" a student should study the *ea!
points again or re%read the entire guideboo!. Other*ise" it is 4uite
probable that fundamental mista!es *ill be made" *hich *ill in turn
interfere *ith indi(idual practice.
+f a score of at least ACK is achie(ed" then a theoretical
!no*ledge of the practice is at an ad(anced le(el" *hich *ill surely
ha(e a positi(e effect on the practitionerFs direct e&periences in the
phase.
3ns*ers are in the appendi& at the end of the guideboo!.
!. ,oise and realistic images unexectedly arise 8hen
erforming the indirect techni'ue of hantom 8iggling. What
can 3e done;
3) .ontinue *ith phantom *iggling.
7) 6*itch to obser(ing images or listening in.
.) Try to do all or some of the techni4ues simultaneously.
9) .hoose the techni4ue *ith the strongest precursors and
continue *ith that one.
%. 6 ractitioner unintentionally oens the eyes for se?eral
seconds uon a8a$ening. What is the 3est 8ay to start indirect
techni'ues from in this case;
3) 3ttempting to separate.
7) The obser(ing images techni4ue.
.) The rapid eye mo(ement techni4ue.
9) The forced falling asleep techni4ue.
E) +tFs best to not start any techni4ue and fall bac! to sleep
*ith the intention of rea*a!ening and trying to do e(erything
again *ithout first mo(ing.
(. Which actions are refera3le for erforming a direct
techni'ue 3efore falling aslee for the night after a long eriod of
slee deri?ation or exhaustion;
3) Monotonously performing the obser(ing images
techni4ue.
7) 7eing attenti(e and concentrating on actions.
.) The absence of a free%floating state of consciousness.
9) Ouic!ly alternating techni4ues.
E) 8igh%4uality rela&ation.
*. -ild ?i3rations occur 8hen erforming a direct techni'ue.
Can the straining the 3rain techni'ue 3e used to amlify the
?i3rations;
3) Pes.
7) )o.
.) +t may be used" but for practical purposes % only *hen a
practitioner is e&hausted or sleep%depri(ed.
9)+t may be used" as long as the attempt to enter the phase
is not being made during the day
+. Which of the actions gi?en 3elo8 increase the li$elihood of
entering the hase through dream consciousness 8hen used right
3efore falling aslee;
3) Performing direct techni4ues.
7) +ntending to perform indirect techni4ues upon
a*a!ening.
.) Recalling dreams from the night before.
9) .reating a plan of action for use in case of entrance to
the phase in such a *ay.
.. If a8areness occurs at the ?ery last moment of a dream that
fades a8ayJ 8hich of the actions gi?en 3elo8 should 3e
underta$en in order to enter the hase as soon as ossi3le;
3) Try to fall asleep again in order to once again become
self%a*are *hile dreaming.
7) +mmediately perform indirect techni4ues.
.) Ta!e a brea! and perform direct techni4ues later.
9) 6tart to recall that nightFs dreams.
/. Which of these are most li$ely to roduce a 'uic$ hase
entry 8hen a8a$ening in a state of slee aralysis;
3) Rela&ation.
7) Falling asleep *ith the intention of becoming self%a*are
*hile in a dream.
.) Mo(ing the physical eyes and tongue.
9) 9irect techni4ues.
0. What should 3e done 8hen sontaneously thro8n from the
3ody 8hile lying do8n or 8a$ing u in the middle of the night;
3) Return to the body and perform appropriate separation
techni4ues.
7) +mplement a predetermined plan of action for the phase.
.) 9eepen immediately.
9) Try to 4uic!ly establish (ision" if it is not already
present.
9) Employ the forced falling asleep techni4ue.
1. While trying to enter the haseJ rolling out 8or$s at firstJ
3ut only artiallyJ and the mo?ement cannot 3e extended any
further no matter 8hat effort is made. What is it 3est to do in this
situation;
3) Try to turn bac! and roll out further once again" and
repeat se(eral times.
7) 6tart doing cycles of indirect techni4ues.
.) Ta!e a brea! and try to separate after se(eral minutes.
9) Try to separate by le(itating" getting up" or climbing out.
E) se any indirect techni4ue for phase entry and attempt
rolling out again.
!5. 6 ractitioner unexectedly gets stuc$ in the floor or 8all
8hile rolling out. What should 3e done to resume the hase;
3) Force through the obstacle.
7) Employ translocation techni4ues.
.) 3ttempt to return to the body and roll out again.
9) 7ecome able to locate an e&it from the problem.
E) Perform sensory amplification.
!!. 9o8 may a ractitioner deeen the hase 8hile flying
through a dar$ formless sace 8hile searating;
3) Employ the techni4ue of falling headfirst.
7) There is no *ay to do this.
.) .reate and amplify (ibrations.
9) 7egin self%palpation.
E) Translocate to another area in the phase and deepen it
through sensory amplification.
!%. If deeening techni'ues do not comletely 8or$ 8ithin !+
to (5 secondsJ 8hat can 3e done;
3) .ontinue trying to go deeper.
7) E&it from the phase.
.) 3ttempt to return to the body and once use phase
entrance techni4ues.
9) Proceed to performing predetermined actions.
!(. Which techni'ue or 8ay of maintaining the hase should
3e used 8hen teleorting some8here 8ith closed eyes;
3) The techni4ue of amplifying and maintaining (ibrations.
7) Tactile sensory amplification" feeling the sensation of
rubbing the hands together.
.) )o techni4ue.
9) The techni4ue of rotation.
E) Repeating aloud the desire to remain in the phase.
!*. In 8hich situations is falling aslee in the hase most
li$ely;
3) 0hen loo!ing for a desired person.
7) 0hen communicating *ith animate ob'ects.
.) 0hen completely calm" ha(ing completely halted all
acti(ity.
9) 0hen tra(elling aimlessly.
E) 0hen ta!ing part in side e(ents.
!+. Which of the follo8ing indicators guarantees that the
hase has 3een exited for reality;
3) 3 cloc! sho*s the right time" and the same time e(en if
a practitioner turns a*ay from it and then loo!s at it again.
7) 6ensations are completely realistic.
.) The presence of friends or family in the room *ho
communicate *ith the practitioner.
9) 3n inner feeling that the phase has ended.
E) )othing happens after staring at the end of a finger from
close distance for fi(e to 1C seconds.
!.. In 8hich situations should tra?elling in the hase 3e
deli3erately discontinued;
3) 0hen a fear that a return *ill be impossible" or a direct
fear of death arises.
7) 0hen there is a real possibility that the practitioner *ill
be late for something in the physical *orld.
.) 0hen frightened by some strange e(ents or ob'ects.
9) 0hen there is an ine&plicable mortal fear of something
un!no*n or incomprehensible.
E) +f someone in the phase strongly insists that the
practitioner should return to reality.
F) +f sharp pain occurs in the body that is not caused by
interaction *ith ob'ects in the phase *orld.
!/. What 8ill most li$ely occur 8hen trying to e?ade some
a8ful 3eing or dangerous erson;
3) The ob'ect *ill get bored and stop.
7) Fear of the ob'ect *ill go a*ay.
.) The phase *ill occur more fre4uently" as *ell as be
longer and deeper than usual.
9) The practitioner *ill become calmer and unner(ed less
fre4uently.
E) The more fear there is" the more often the ob'ect *ill
chase the practitioner.
!0. When should esta3lishing ?ision in the hase 3e
consideredJ if it has not occurred on its o8n;
3) +mmediately upon separation *ithout deepening.
7) +mmediately after deepening.
.) 0hile flying through dar! space during translocation.
9) 3fter fi(e to 1C seconds of being sure that a phase entry
has occurred.
E) 0hen there is a desire to immediately e&plore the
surroundings after separation has occurred.
!1. 9o8 is it ossi3le to ass through a 8all 8hile standing
close to itJ 8ithout stoing to loo$ at it from close range;
3) 7y gradually pushing the hands and arms through it" and
then the entire body and head.
7) 7y gradually pushing the head through it at first" and
then the entire body.
.) 7y trying to put a hole in it" and then e&panding the hole
and climbing through it.
9) 7y ramming it *ith a shoulder" trying to bring it do*n.

%5. While in the haseJ a ractitioner is in a situation 8here
the arms are totally aralyHed and immo3iliHed. &his haens in
a room 8ith a single exitD a door that has started to close. What
are the t8o easiest 8ays to $ee the door oen;
3) Order the door to stay open in a loud" imperious" and
asserti(e manner.
7) Free the arms and hold bac! the door.
.) 6top the door *ith tele!inesis.
9) .reate a person through the method of finding.
E) There is no *ay to do this.
%!. What difficulties may arise for a ractitioner in the hase
8hile using the door techni'ue of translocation;
3) The door *ill not open.
7) The *rong place is behind the door.
.) +t is not possible to use the hand to pull the door handle
because the hand goes through the handle.
9) 9ifficulties *ith internal concentration occur at the
critical moment.
E) 3 blac! (oid often appears on the other side of the door.
%%. What are necessary conditions for getting results 8hen
translocating in the hase after rolling out during initial
searation from the 3ody;
3) 3bsence of (ision.
7) Practicing after sunset.
.) 3 firm intention to end up some*here.
9) .ertainty of the final result.
E) The presence of (ibrations.
%(. 6 ractitioner is in a dar$ room in the hase 8here
e?erything is oorly ?isi3le. &here is a chandelierJ 3ut no light
s8itch. 9o8 can the s8itch 3e acti?ated to light the room;
3) Translocate through teleportation to the place *here the
toggle or s*itch for the light in 4uestion is located.
7) Find a flashlight through the method of finding and
illuminate the room *ith it.
.) Rub the light bulbs in the chandelier *ith the hands.
9) .reate a light s*itch in the room using the method of
finding an ob'ect.
E) .lose the eyes and imagine that the room is already lit"
and then open the eyes.
%*. When communicating 8ith an animate o34ect in the haseJ
a desire to add a secific erson to the scenery arises. Which of
the follo8ing actions are ad?isa3le only for 3eginners in this
case;
3) Propose going to a neighboring room *here the needed
sub'ect *ill be presented through the use of the door or corner
techni4ue.
7) 6ummon the needed person by calling their name loudly.
.) Translocate bac! to the same place" and ha(e both
animate ob'ects present there upon your return.
9) 3dd the needed person through the closed eyes
techni4ue.
E) 3s! the animate ob'ect that you are tal!ing to if it does
not mind adding someone to the scenery.
%+. Where is one not allo8ed to go using translocation
techni'ues;
3) +nside a mammoth.
7) To the past or the future.
.) To hea(en.
9) To an episode of the mo(ie Star 5ars.
%.. 9o8 8ill a deceased erson differ from a rototye in the
hase 8hen correctly erforming the techni'ue for finding the
erson;
3) Only the practitioner himself can con'ure up differences"
or not see or percei(e them.
7) The deceased *ill ha(e a different timbre of (oice.
.) There *ill be a radiant halo around the deceasedFs head.
9) Physical perception of the deceased *ill be less realistic
than in real life.
E) The deceased *ill not remember anything.
%/. What difficulties can arise in the hase 8hile o3taining
information from animate sources of information;
3) +nability to remember information obtained.
7) 6ources of information are silent.
.) +nade4uateness of the sources of information.
9) 6e&ual attraction" if the source of information is of the
opposite or desired se&.
E) 7eing gi(en false information.
%0. 9o8 might a ractitioner accelerate the healing rocess of
a cold that is characteriHed 3y a stuffy nose and a sore throat;
3) Maintaining and amplifying (ibrations for the entire
length of the phase" and entering it o(er se(eral days in a ro*.
7) Ta!ing aspirin and entering the phase o(er se(eral days
in a ro*.
.) Tra(elling to hot places in the phase and entering it o(er
se(eral days in a ro*.
9) E&periencing stressful situations o(er se(eral phases.
E) Finding a doctor in the phase and as!ing him *hat it is
best to do in real%life or e(en in the phase itself.
%1. Which of the follo8ing achie?ements 3elong to Stehen
<aBerge;
3) Founding the 2ucidity +nstitute.
7) 3 Ph.9. in anthropology.
.) 6cientifically pro(ing that lucid dreaming is possible.
9) 3 Ph.9. in psychophysiology.
E) Pro(ing that eye mo(ements in the phase and in reality
are synchroni?ed.
(5. Who of aroached the study of the hase state from a
ragmatic oint-of-?ie8 that 8as totally de?oid of occultism;
3) 6tephen 2a7erge
7) Robert Monroe
.) 6yl(an Muldoon
9) .harles 2eadbeater
E) Patricia 5arfield
F) .arlos .astaneda
6endix
6SSESS-E,& O2 P:6C&I&IO,E:S7
EEPE:IE,CES AC96P&E: !%B

These assessments of the practitionersF e&periences refer only to
the specific descriptions that they submitted and are not meant as an
assessment of their practice as a *hole. 6ome of practitioners *ould
easily be able to e&perience successful phases earning four to fi(e
points at other times. This especially concerns 7oris Pronya!in"
3le&ander 9yren!o(" 7oris 7ender" and 3le&ei Teslen!o. This is also
possibly true of the other practitioners" *ith *hom the author is not
closely ac4uainted.
)o. 1 7oris Pronya!in I C.= points
)o. - 3le&ei 7a!hare( I C.= points
)o. : 9mitry Mar!o( I C points
)o. < +(an Pa!o(le( I 1.= points
)o. = )atalya Do?heno(a I 1 point
)o. > 3le&ander Furmen!o( I 1 point
)o.@ Roman Reuto( I : points
)o. A 3le&ander 9yren!o( I 1.= points
)o. B 6(yatosla( 7arano( I - points
)o. 1C Oleg 6ushchen!o I -.= points
)o. 11 3le&ander 2ele!o( I 1.= points
)o. 1- 7oris 7ender I - points
)o. 1: 3le&ei Teslen!o I : points
6,SWE:S &O &9E 2I,6< &ES& AC96P&E: !*B
1. 3"7"."9J
-. 9J
:. 7" ." 9J
<. .J
=. 3"7"."9J
>. 7J
@. I
A. .J
B. 3" 9" EJ
1C. 7" .J
11. 3"."9"EJ
1-. 3"9"3Q9J
1:. .J
1<. 9" EJ
1=. EJ
1>. 7" FJ
1@. ." EJ
1A. 7" 9J
1B. I
-C. 3" .J
-1. 3" 7" 9J
--. 3" ." 9J
-:. EJ
-<. 7J
-=. IJ
->. 3J
-@. 7"."9"EJ
-A. 7"."EJ
-B. 3"."9"EJ
:C. 3" EJ
6 SI-P<I2IE) )ESC:IP&IO, O2 &9E E6SIES&
-E&9O) 2O: E,&E:I,# &9E P96SE
USI,# I,)I:EC& &EC9,I=UES
pon a*a!ening" *ithout mo(ing or opening the eyes"
immediately try to separate from oneGs body. The separation attempt
should be carried out *ithout any imagining" but rather *ith the
desire to ma!e a real mo(ement *ithout straining the muscles
(rolling out" le(itation" standing up" etc.).
+f separation does not occur *ithin three to fi(e seconds"
immediately try alternating se(eral of the most effecti(e techni4ues
for three to fi(e seconds each. 0hen one of the techni4ues *or!s"
continue it for a longer period of time/
% Obser(ing images/ Try to e&amine and discern the pictures
arising before closed eyes.
% 2istening in/ 3ttempt to hear sounds in the head and ma!e these
louder by listening in or strengthening the *illJ
% Rotating/ +magine rotating around the head%to%foot a&isJ
% Phantom *iggling/ Try to mo(e a part of the body *ithout
straining the muscles" and try to increase the range of mo(ementJ
% 6training the brain/ Try straining the brain" *hich *ill lead to
(ibrations that may also be intensified by straining the brain.
3s soon as one techni4ue clearly starts to *or!" continue *ith it
as long as progress is apparent" and then try to separate. +f separation
fails" return to the techni4ue that *as *or!ing.
9o not gi(e up alternating through techni4ues until one minute has
elapsed" but do not continue for more than t*o minutes. 6eparation
from the body may be attempted periodically" especially if interesting
sensations occur.
&6>E P6:& I, :ESE6:C9
Ta!e part in the research of a techni4ue. The techni4ue of
imagined sensations is described in .hapter - in the section on
6econdary Techni4ues. This techni4ue is also commonly !no*n as
the #cell phone techni4ue$. 0hile this guideboo! *as being *ritten"
e&periments *ith this techni4ue *ere conducted at the 6chool of Out%
of%7ody Tra(elFs seminars. Results *ere astounding. 9ue to the fact
that this techni4ue is easy to understand and apply in practice" it
could be the most straightfor*ard and effecti(e one for achie(ing the
phase state. 3lmost e(ery second attempt made *ith this techni4ue
has yielded results" pro(ided it is employed as an indirect techni4ue.
9ue to this techni4ueFs huge potential for populari?ing and
spreading !no*ledge of the phenomenon" anyone *ho is interested is
in(ited to ta!e part in a global e&periment of the techni4ueFs
effecti(eness. +n addition to testing it" a researcher may propose the
techni4ue to interested persons or post it on the +nternet to increase
the number of practitioners. Please submit the results of your
e&periments *ith the techni4ue to the e%mail address/ aing,aing.ru
8ere it is/
&9E CE<< P9O,E &EC9,I=UE
The practice of this phase entry techni4ue is to imagine the
sensation that something is resting in the hand" desirably upon
a*a!ening *ithout any physical mo(ement. +t is best to imagine a
cell phone is in the hand because the modern person is 4uite
accustomed to this sensation" although any other ob'ect *ill do. +t is
necessary to acti(ely and attenti(ely focus on the sensations in the
palm of the hand. Most li!ely" the physical sensation of a phone lying
in the hand *ill 4uic!ly arise. The sensation *ill become increasingly
palpable. +f a sensation does not arise *ithin 1C seconds" the
techni4ue not going to *or! and it is time to s*itch to another one.
0hen the sensation of a phone in the hand occurs" focus e(ery bit
of attention on it. +t should be noted that this *ill not be an imagined
sensation" but a real one. This should be understood from the (ery
beginning" and results should be e&pected. Once the sensation is
stable" start feeling the mobile phone *ith the fingers. Physical
sensations should be e&perienced. The physical body" of course" must
not mo(e or strain. +f this does not *or!" only focus attention on the
sensation of the phone lying in the hand and try to feel the phone
*ith the fingers later. +f feeling the phone *ith the fingers is
successful" acti(ely roll the phone around the hand" feeling all of its
details.
3s soon as it is possible to roll the cell phone around in the hand"
separation from the body may be attempted. +n this case it is usually
easiest to separate by rolling out or standing up. .ontinue to hold the
phone and roll it around" *hich *ill maintain the emerging phase
state. 6eparation in this case should be more li!e actually getting up
physically or rolling out of bed" rather than actually separating one
thing from something else. That is" do this in the same *ay as
physically getting out of bed" starting from the sensation of the phone
in the hand.
+f separation is unsuccessful" continue to attenti(ely feel the phone
in the hand for a little *hile longer and try to separate again. +f
separation happens" the ne&t step is to ta!e actions that are typical for
a phase e&perience/ deepening" and then accomplishing
predetermined tas!s *hile performing #maintaining$ techni4ues. +f
only a partial separation occurs" then separation by force should be
attempted.
5enerally" the real sensation of a phone in the hand arises *ith
e(ery second attempt. Furthermore" achie(ing success only re4uires
e&perience and some de&terity since feeling the sensation of a phone
in the hand signifies that the re4uired state has been reached and
subse4uent actions may be attempted.
6&&E,&IO,F
0hen ma!ing attempts to enter the phase" the practitioner should
ha(e complete confidence that he *ill be immediately successful in
e(erything. E(en a shroud of doubt *ill !eep the practitioner in his
body" this is especially true *hen it comes to indirect techni4ues.
Four typical barriers to mastering the phase encountered by BCK of
practicioners/
1 % Forgetting to deepen the phase
- % Forgetting to maintain the phase
: % 3bsence of a plan of action *hen in the phase
< % Forgetting to try to re%enter the phase after a foul
&9E SC9OO< O2 OU&-O2-BO)Y &:6@E<
Michael RadugaFs 6chool of Out%of%7ody Tra(el conducts
training seminars in many countries around the *orld. The
course*or! allo*s students to master the phase phenomenon and
hone their s!ills at tra(eling in the phase. +nformation on e&isting
branches and seminar schedules are a(ailable on the *ebsite
www.obe4u.com. 0e also *elcome potential partners interested in
organi?ing 6chool of Out%of%7ody Tra(el branches and seminars. 3ll
correspondence regarding seminars" partnerships" and proposals
related to the translation of this boo! may be handled by e%mail at
aing,aing.ru.
B:IE2 #<OSS6:Y O2 &E:-S 6,) )E2I,I&IO,S
Out-of-Body exerience AOBEBJ lucid dreaming A<)BJ astral " a
number of terms united by the phase that refer to the state in *hich a
person" *hile being fully conscious" reali?es consciousness outside
the normal range of physical perception.
Indirect techni'ues I entry into the phase *ithin fi(e minutes of
a*a!ening from sleep of any duration % pro(ided there has been
minimal physical mo(ement.
)irect techni'ues I entry into the phase *ithout any prior sleep"
after e&cessi(e physical mo(ement upon a*a!ening" or ha(ing been
a*a!e for at least fi(e minutes.
)ream Consciousness I entry into the phase through becoming
consciously a*are *hile a dream episode is happening.
)issociation I separationJ in this case" a scientific term describing
e&periences in the phase.
Slee aralysis I a stuporJ the complete immobili?ation that often
occurs *hen falling asleep" a*a!ening" and entering or e&iting the
phase.
Stencil I the real physical body that is no longer percei(ed *hile in
the phase.
)eeening the hase I methods for ma!ing the phase as realistic
as possible by stabili?ing the surrounding space.
-aintaining the hase I methods for maintaining the phase state
by pre(enting a lapse into sleep" a return to reality" or an imagined
return to reality.
:E- I rapid eye mo(ement sleep (REM phase)J a sleep phase that
is characteri?ed by increased brain acti(ity that is accompanied by
rapid eye mo(ement and dreaming.
2oul I an inad(ertent termination of the phase through a
spontaneous return to e(eryday reality.
Cycles of indirect techni'ues %% the easiest *ay to enter the phase"
employed by rapidly alternating certain techni4ues upon a*a!ening
from sleep until one of them *or!s.
SC9OO< O2 <UCI) ):E6-I,# II
PE:SO,6< EEPE:IE,CES
&his 3oo$ is the freestanding sulement to The School of Astral
Projection I A Practical Guidebook. It is intended to gi?e a first-
hand demonstration of the out-of-3ody exerience in racticeJ
8hile 3ringing attention to correct actions and mista$es made
8hen out-of-3ody.
+tFs one thing to !no* *hich techni4ues can be used to control and
lea(e the perception of the body" but another thing to actually !no*
ho* to use those techni4ues. +tFs one thing to read descriptions of a
single indi(idualFs e&periences" but another to learn about ho* a
large number of other practitioners regard the techni4ues and feel
about them. )ot e(eryone is able to figure out *hat e&actly to do and
ho* to do it *ithout reading this boo!. Techni4ue%related theory and
real e&perience are essentially t*o different things.
The po*er inherent in this collection of personal practitioner
e&periences is such that e(en if you ne(er intend to try out the
techni4ues described in it" you are practically guaranteed to
ne(ertheless encounter this phenomenon" as it *ill enter your
subconscious mind as a !ind of programming that *ill sooner or later
acti(ate at the right moment. This collection is all the more beneficial
for those *ho *ould li!e to recei(e real guidance in their
e&plorations. 3ll of the fundamental mista!es that practitioners are
prone to ma!e are described and analy?ed here. 8a(ing read the
boo!" the practitioner *ill be armed *ith !no*ledge of the most
distilled and (erified !ind.
+n preparation for this boo!" the personal e&periences of hundreds of
practitioners *ere collected at seminars" through the *ebsite" and by
mail. 8o*e(er" only the most demonstrati(e descriptions *ere
chosen for inclusion. Thus" the selected descriptions are in(aluable
not only for those *ho ha(e 'ust started out on their 'ourney *ith the
most e&traordinary practice of out%of%body tra(el" but also for those
*ho already ha(e substantial e&perience *ith it.
+ *ould li!e to e&press my gratitude to all those *ho assisted me in
putting together this one%of%a%!ind compilation. Pou ha(e made a
contribution to this field of study and it only remains for me to *ish
you further success" *hich *ill sho* that my commentary on your
e&periences *as right on.
Michael Raduga
Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel
March 2, 2!
Table of .ontents/
Part !
2ea(ing the Perception of the 7ody
Part II
Out%of%7ody E&periments
Part III
The E&periences of 0ell%Dno*n 3uthors
Part I@
9emonstrati(e .ase 6tudies
6endix
www.obe4u.com
Proposals regarding translating and publishing this boo! and other
*or!s of M.Raduga may be sent to aing@aing.ru
A&he real name of this 3oo$ is KSchool of Out-of-Body &ra?el .
6 Practical #uide3oo$LB

Ultimate Yoga. Yoga of The Inner World. Exercices. Free E-Book

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Ultimate Yoga. Yoga of The Inner World. Exercices. Free E-Book

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

1

Вам также может понравиться